Asus P5MT-MX C User Manual
M o t h e r b o a r d P5MT-MX/C
i i E 2 5 0 1 R e v i s e d E d i t i o n V 2 M a r c h 2 0 0 6 Copyright © 2006 ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. (âASUSâ). Product warranty or service will not be extended if: (1) the product is repaired, modiï¬ed or altered, unless such repair, modiï¬cation of alteration is authorized in writing by ASUS; or (2) the serial number of the product is defaced or missing. ASUS PROVIDES THIS MANUAL âAS ISâ WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ASUS, ITS DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF USE OR DATA, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS AND THE LIKE), EVEN IF ASUS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY DEFECT OR ERROR IN THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT. SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL ARE FURNISHED FOR INFORMATIONAL USE ONLY, AND ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY ASUS. ASUS ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS OR INACCURACIES THAT MAY APPEAR IN THIS MANUAL, INCLUDING THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE DESCRIBED IN IT. Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identiï¬cation or explanation and to the ownersʼ beneï¬t, without intent to infringe.
i i i Contents Notices ................................................................................................ vi Safety information ............................................................................. vii About this guide ................................................................................. viii P5MT-MX/C speciï¬cations summary .................................................... x C h a p t e r 1 : P r o d u c t i n t r o d u c t i o n 1.1 Welcome! .............................................................................. 1-1 1.2 Package contents ................................................................. 1-1 1.3 Special features .................................................................... 1-2 1.3.1 Product highlights ................................................... 1-2 1.3.2 Innovative ASUS features ....................................... 1-4 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2.1 Before you proceed .............................................................. 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview .......................................................... 2-2 2.2.1 Placement direction ................................................ 2-2 2.2.2 Screw holes ............................................................. 2-2 2.2.3 Motherboard layout ................................................ 2-3 2.2.4 Layout contents ..................................................... 2-4 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) .............................................. 2-6 2.3.1 Installing the CPU .................................................... 2-6 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and fan ......................... 2-9 2.3.3 Uninstalling the CPU heatsink and fan ................... 2-11 2.4 System memory .................................................................. 2-13 2.4.1 Overview ............................................................... 2-13 2.4.2 Memory conï¬gurations ......................................... 2-13 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM ................................................... 2-15 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM .................................................. 2-15 2.5 Expansion slots ................................................................... 2-16 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card .................................. 2-16 2.5.2 Conï¬guring an expansion card .............................. 2-16 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments ........................................... 2-17 2.5.4 PCI Express x16 slot ............................................. 2-18 2.5.4 PCI Express x8 slot ............................................... 2-18 2.5.5 PCI slots ................................................................ 2-18 2.6 Jumpers .............................................................................. 2-19
i v Contents 2.7 Connectors ......................................................................... 2-24 2.7.1 Rear panel connectors .......................................... 2-24 2.7.2 Internal connectors ............................................... 2-25 C h a p t e r 3 : P o w e r i n g u p 3.1 Starting up for the ï¬rst time ................................................ 3-1 3.2 Turning off the computer ..................................................... 3-2 3.2.1 Using the OS shut down function ........................... 3-2 3.2.2 Using the dual function power switch ..................... 3-2 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ........................................ 4-1 4.1.1 Creating a bootable ï¬oppy disk .............................. 4-1 4.1.2 AFUDOS utility ........................................................ 4-2 4.1.3 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ................................ 4-5 4.1.4 ASUS Update utility ................................................ 4-7 4.2 BIOS setup program ............................................................ 4-10 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen ................................................. 4-11 4.2.2 Menu bar ............................................................... 4-11 4.2.3 Navigation keys ..................................................... 4-11 4.2.4 Menu items ........................................................... 4-12 4.2.5 Sub-menu items .................................................... 4-12 4.2.6 Conï¬guration ï¬elds ............................................... 4-12 4.2.7 Pop-up window ...................................................... 4-12 4.2.8 Scroll bar ............................................................... 4-12 4.2.9 General help .......................................................... 4-12 4.3 Main menu ........................................................................... 4-13 4.3.1 System Time ........................................................ 4-13 4.3.2 System Date ........................................................ 4-13 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A ............................................... 4-13 4.3.4 Primary, Third, and Fourth IDE Master/Slave ........ 4-14 4.3.5 IDE Conï¬guration .................................................. 4-15 4.3.6 System Information .............................................. 4-17 4.4 Advanced menu .................................................................. 4-18 4.4.1 USB Conï¬guration ................................................. 4-18 4.4.2 MPS Conï¬guration ................................................. 4-19 4.4.3 Remote Access Conï¬guration ............................... 4-20
v Contents 4.4.4 CPU Conï¬guration ................................................. 4-21 4.4.5 Chipset .................................................................. 4-23 4.4.6 Onboard Devices Conï¬guration ............................. 4-25 4.4.7 PCI PnP .................................................................. 4-26 4.5 Power menu ........................................................................ 4-27 4.5.1 ACPI APIC Support ................................................ 4-27 4.5.2 APM Conï¬guration ................................................ 4-28 4.5.3 Hardware Monitor .................................................. 4-29 4.6 Boot menu .......................................................................... 4-31 4.6.1 Boot Device Priority .............................................. 4-31 4.6.2 Boot Settings Conï¬guration ................................. 4-32 4.6.3 Security ................................................................. 4-33 4.7 Exit menu ............................................................................ 4-35 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n s 5.1 RAID conï¬guration ................................................................ 5-1 5.1.1 RAID deï¬nitions ....................................................... 5-1 5.1.2 Installing Serial ATA hard disks ............................... 5-2 5.1.3 Setting RAID item in BIOS ....................................... 5-2 5.1.4 RAID conï¬guration utility ........................................ 5-2 5.2 Intel Matrix Storage Manager option ROM utility .................. 5-3 5.2.1 Creating a RAID 0 set (striped) .............................. 5-4 5.2.2 Creating a RAID 1 set (mirrored) ............................ 5-6 5.2.3 Creating a RAID 10 set (RAID 0 1) ...................... 5-7 5.2.4 Creating a RAID 5 set (parity) ................................ 5-8 5.2.5 Deleting a RAID set ............................................... 5-10 5.2.6 Resetting Disks to Non-RAID ................................. 5-11 5.2.7 Exiting the Intel Matrix Storage Manager utility ...................................................... 5-11 5.3 LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility .................... 5-12 5.3.1 Creating a RAID set ............................................... 5-13 5.3.2 Adding or viewing a RAID conï¬guration ................ 5-19 5.3.3 Initializing the logical drives .................................. 5-22 5.3.4 Rebuilding failed drives ......................................... 5-27 5.3.5 Checking the drives for data consistency ............. 5-29 5.3.6 Deleting a RAID conï¬guration ............................... 5-32
v i 5.3.7 Selecting the boot drive from a RAID set ............. 5-33 5.3.8 Enabling the WriteCache ....................................... 5-34 5.4 Global Array Manager .......................................................... 5-34 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 6.1 RAID driver installation .......................................................... 6-1 6.1.1 Creating a RAID driver disk ..................................... 6-1 6.1.2 Installing the RAID controller driver ........................ 6-3 6.2 LAN driver installation ........................................................ 6-11 6.2.1 Windows ® 2000/2003 Server .............................. 6-11 6.2.2 Red Hat ® Enterprise ver. 3.0 ................................. 6-13 6.3 VGA driver installation ........................................................ 6-15 6.3.1 Windows ® 2000 Server ......................................... 6-15 6.3.2 Windows ® 2003 Server ......................................... 6-16 6.3.3 Red Hat ® Enterprise ver. 3.0 ................................. 6-16 6.4 Management applications and utilites installation .............. 6-17 6.4.1 Running the support CD ........................................ 6-17 6.4.2 Drivers menu ......................................................... 6-17 6.4.3 Management Software menu ................................ 6-18 6.4.4 Utilities menu ........................................................ 6-18 6.4.5 Contact information .............................................. 6-18 A p p e n d i x : R e f e r e n c e i n f o r m a t i o n A.1 Intel ® EM64T ......................................................................... A-1 A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep ® Technology (EIST) .................... A-1 A.2.1 System requirements .............................................. A-1 A.2.2 Using the EIST ......................................................... A-2 A.3 Intel ® Hyper-Threading Technology ...................................... A-3 A.4 Block diagram ....................................................................... A-4
v i i Notices F e d e r a l C o m m u n i c a t i o n s C o m m i s s i o n S t a t e m e n t This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference, and ⢠This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with manufacturerʼs instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. ⢠Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. C a n a d i a n D e p a r t m e n t o f C o m m u n i c a t i o n s S t a t e m e n t This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. The use of shielded cables for connection of the monitor to the graphics card is required to assure compliance with FCC regulations. Changes or modiï¬cations to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the userʼs authority to operate this equipment.
v i i i Safety information E l e c t r i c a l s a f e t y ⢠To prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet before relocating the system. ⢠When adding or removing devices to or from the system, ensure that the power cables for the devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power cables from the existing system before you add a device. ⢠Before connecting or removing signal cables from the motherboard, ensure that all power cables are unplugged. ⢠Seek professional assistance before using an adapter or extension cord. These devices could interrupt the grounding circuit. ⢠Make sure that your power supply is set to the correct voltage in your area. If you are not sure about the voltage of the electrical outlet you are using, contact your local power company. ⢠If the power supply is broken, do not try to fix it by yourself. Contact a qualified service technician or your retailer. O p e r a t i o n s a f e t y ⢠Before installing the motherboard and adding devices on it, carefully read all the manuals that came with the package. ⢠Before using the product, make sure all cables are correctly connected and the power cables are not damaged. If you detect any damage, contact your dealer immediately. ⢠To avoid short circuits, keep paper clips, screws, and staples away from connectors, slots, sockets and circuitry. ⢠Avoid dust, humidity, and temperature extremes. Do not place the product in any area where it may become wet. ⢠Place the product on a stable surface. ⢠If you encounter technical problems with the product, contact a qualified service technician or your retailer. The symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the product (electrical and electronic equipment) should not be placed in municipal waste. Check local regulations for disposal of electronic products.
i x About this guide This user guide contains the information you need when installing and conï¬guring the motherboard. H o w t h i s g u i d e i s o r g a n i z e d This manual contains the following parts: ⢠C h a p t e r 1 : P r o d u c t i n t r o d u c t i o n This chapter describes the features of the motherboard and the new technology it supports. ⢠C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the switches, jumpers, and connectors on the motherboard. ⢠C h a p t e r 3 : P o w e r i n g u p This chapter describes the power up sequence, the vocal POST messages, and ways of shutting down the system. ⢠C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p Tells how to change system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided. ⢠C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D s u p p o r t Provides information on RAID conï¬gurations for this motherboard. ⢠C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n This chapter provides information on RAID, LAN and VGA driver installation for this motherboard. ⢠A p p e n d i x : R e f e r e n c e i n f o r m a t i o n This appendix includes additional information that you may refer to when conï¬guring the motherboard. W h e r e t o f i n d m o r e i n f o r m a t i o n Refer to the following sources for additional information and for product and software updates. 1 . A S U S w e b s i t e s The ASUS website provides updated information on ASUS hardware and software products. Refer to the ASUS contact information. 2 . O p t i o n a l d o c u m e n t a t i o n Your product package may include optional documentation, such as warranty ï¬yers, that may have been added by your dealer. These documents are not part of the standard package.
x C o n v e n t i o n s u s e d i n t h i s g u i d e To make sure that you perform certain tasks properly, take note of the following symbols used throughout this manual. T y p o g r a p h y Bold text Indicates a menu or an item to select. Italics Used to emphasize a word or a phrase. <Key> Keys enclosed in the less-than and greater-than sign means that you must press the enclosed key. Example: <Enter> means that you must press the Enter or Return key. <Key1> <Key2> <Key3> If you must press two or more keys simultaneously, the key names are linked with a plus sign ( ). Example: <Ctrl> <Alt> <Del> Command Means that you must type the command exactly as shown, then supply the required item or value enclosed in brackets. Example: At the DOS prompt, type the command line: afudos /i[ï¬lename] afudos /iP5MT-MXC.ROM DANGER/WARNING: Information to prevent injury to yourself when trying to complete a task. CAUTION: Information to prevent damage to the components when trying to complete a task. NOTE: Tips and additional information to help you complete a task. IMPORTANT: Instructions that you MUST follow to complete a task.
x i P5MT-MX/C speciï¬cations summary (continued on the next page) C P U C h i p s e t F r o n t S i d e B u s M e m o r y E x p a n s i o n s l o t s S t o r a g e G r a p h i c s L A N U S B S p e c i a l f e a t u r e s B I O S f e a t u r e s R e a r p a n e l LGA775 socket for Intel ® Pentium ® Processor Extreme Edition/Intel ® Pentium ® D processor with Extended Memory 64-bit Technology (EM64T) Supports Intel ® Hyper-Threading Technology Northbridge: Intel ® E7230 Memory Controller Hub (MCH) Southbridge: Intel ® ICH7R 1066/800 MHz Dual-channel memory architecture 4 x 240-pin DIMM sockets support unbuffered ECC/Non-ECC 667/533 MHz DDR2 memory modules Supports 128 MB up to 8 GB of system memory 1 x PCI Exp re ss ⢠x16 s lo t 16 4P (x 8 li nk, PCI E xp re ss 1 .0a ) 1 x PCI Express⢠x8 slot 98P (x4 link, PCI Express 1.0a) 2 x PCI 33 MHz/32-bit/5V slots (PCI 2.3) Intel ® ICH7R Southbridge supports: - 2 x Ultra DMA 100/66/33 hard disk drives - 4 x Serial ATA II hard disks with RAID functionality using the Intel ® Matrix Storage (RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10, and RAID 5 conï¬guration), or the LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID controller (RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10) ATI ® RAGE-XL PCI-based VGA controller Embedded Broadcom BCM5753 G ig ab it L AN c on tr ol ler (PCI Express 1.0a speciï¬cations compliant) Intel ® ICH7R Southbridge supports: - 8 x USB 2.0/1.1 ports (two on the rear panel, three connectors at mid-board for up to six additional ports) ASUS Smart Fan ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS MyLogo2⢠AMI BIOS, 8 Mb FWH, Green, PnP, DMI2.0a, ACPI 2.0a, SMBIOS 2.3 1 x PS/2 keyboard port 1 x PS/2 mouse port 2 x USB 2.0 ports 1 x Serial (COM1) port 1 x LAN (RJ-45) port 1 x VGA port 1 x Parallel port
x i i P5MT-MX/C speciï¬cations summary 1 x Floppy disk drive connector 1 x Hard disk activity LED connector 1 x IDE connector 4 x Serial ATA connectors 2 x CPU fan connectors 4 x System fan connectors 1 x Serial port (COM2) connector 3 x USB connectors 1 x 24-pin ATX power connector 1 x 4-pin ATX 12 V power connector 1 x Backplane SMBus connector 1 x Chassis intrusion connector 1 x Ambient thermal sensor connector 1 x System panel connector SSI power supply (with 24-pin and 4-pin 12 V plugs) ATX 12V 2.0 compliant micro-ATX form factor: 9.6 â x 9.6 â (24.4 cm x 24.4 cm) Device drivers ASUS Update ASUS Server Web-based Management (ASWM) 2.0 I n t e r n a l c o n n e c t o r s P o w e r R e q u i r e m e n t F o r m F a c t o r S u p p o r t C D c o n t e n t s *Speciï¬cations are subject to change without notice.
1 Product introduction This chapter describes the motherboard features and the new technologies it supports.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C Chapter summary 1 1.1 Welcome! .............................................................................. 1-1 1.2 Package contents ................................................................. 1-1 1.3 Special features .................................................................... 1-2
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 1 - 1 1.1 Welcome! Thank you for buying an ASUS ® P5MT-MX/C motherboard! The motherboard delivers a host of new features and latest technologies, making it another standout in the long line of ASUS quality motherboards! Before you start installing the motherboard, and hardware devices on it, check the items in your package with the list below. 1.2 Package contents Check your motherboard package for the following items. Motherboard ASUS P5MT-MX/C motherboard Cables 2-in-1 disk drive cable 4 x Serial ATA signal cables 2 x Serial ATA power cables Accessories I/O shield Application CD ASUS motherboard support CD Documentation User guide If any of the above items is damaged or missing, contact your retailer.
1 - 2 C h a p t e r 1 : P r o d u c t i n t r o d u c t i o n 1.3 Special features 1 . 3 . 1 P r o d u c t h i g h l i g h t s L a t e s t p r o c e s s o r t e c h n o l o g y The motherboard comes with a 775-pin surface mount Land Grid Array (LGA) socket designed for the Intel ® Pentium ® Processor Extreme Edition and the Intel ® Pentium ® D processor in the 775-land package, with 1066/800 MHz Front Side Bus (FSB). See page 2-6 for details. I n t e l ® E 7 2 3 0 / I n t e l ® I C H 7 R c h i p s e t The Intel ® E7230 and the Intel ® ICH7R I/O controller hub (ICH) provide the vital interfaces for the motherboard. The uniprocessor server chipset integrates EM64T support and four Serial ATA ports enabled through the Serial ATA 3 Gb/s RAID controller to ensure data security and enable powerful multi-task processing. I n t e l ® E M 6 4 T The motherboard supports the Intel ® Hyper-Threading technology and incorporates the Extended Memory 64-bit Technology (EM64T). The Intel ® EM64T feature allows your system to run on 64-bit operating systems and access larger amounts of system memory for faster and more efï¬cient computing. D D R 2 m e m o r y s u p p o r t The motherboard supports DDR2 memory, which features data transfer rates of 667 MHz or 533 MHz to meet the higher bandwidth requirements of the latest 3D graphics, multimedia, and Internet applications. The dual-channel DDR2 architecture doubles the bandwidth of your system memory to boost system performance, eliminating bottlenecks with peak bandwidths of up to 10.7 GB/s. See page 2-13 for details. S e r i a l A T A I I t e c h n o l o g y The mot her boa rd supp ort s t he S eri al ATA II technology through the Serial ATA II interfaces controlled by the Intel ® ICH7R. The SATA II speciï¬cation allows for thinner, more ï¬exible cables with lower pin count, reduced voltage requirement, and up to 300 MB/s data transfer rate. See page 2-27 for details.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 1 - 3 P C I E x p r e s s ⢠i n t e r f a c e Th e m ot her bo ard f ull y s up por ts PC I Exp re ss, the latest I/O interconnect technology that speeds up the PCI bus. PCI Express features point-to-point serial interconnections between devices and allows higher clockspeeds by carrying data in packets. This high speed interface is software compatible with existing PCI speciï¬cations. See page 2-18 for details. G i g a b i t L A N s o l u t i o n The motherboard comes with an onboard Gigabit LAN controller to provide a total solution for your networking needs. The onboard Broadcom BCM5753 controller uses the PCI Express interface with a network throughput close to Gigabit bandwidth. See pages 2-21 and 2-24 for details. S e r i a l A T A R A I D s o l u t i o n Onboard RAID controllers provide the motherboard with RAID functionality. The Intel ® ICH7R allows RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, and RAID 10 conï¬guration for four Serial ATA connectors and supports the Intel ® Matrix Technology. See page 2-27 and Chapter 5 for details. U S B 2 . 0 t e c h n o l o g y The motherboard implements the Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0 speciï¬cation, dramatically increasing the connection speed from the 12 Mbps bandwidth on USB 1.1 to a fast 480 Mbps on USB 2.0. USB 2.0 is backward compatible with USB 1.1. See pages 2-20, 2-24 and 2-29 for details.
1 - 4 C h a p t e r 1 : P r o d u c t i n t r o d u c t i o n 1 . 3 . 2 I n n o v a t i v e A S U S f e a t u r e s A S U S S m a r t F a n t e c h n o l o g y The ASUS Smart Fan technology smartly adjusts the fan speeds according to the system loading to ensure quiet, cool, and efï¬cient operation. See page 4-30 for details. A S U S M y L o g o 2 ⢠This feature allows you to personalize and add style to your system with customizable boot logos. See page 4-32 for details. A S U S C r a s h F r e e B I O S 2 Th is fe atu re al lo ws you t o r es tor e the o rig in al BIO S dat a fro m the s upp or t CD in c ase w hen t he BI OS cod es an d dat a get co rr upt ed. T his p rot ec tio n el imi na tes t he ne ed to bu y a r epl ac eme nt RO M chi p. Se e p ag e 4-5 for details.
2 Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the jumpers and connectors on the motherboard.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C Chapter summary 2 2.1 Before you proceed .............................................................. 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview .......................................................... 2-2 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) .............................................. 2-6 2.4 System memory .................................................................. 2-13 2.5 Expansion slots ................................................................... 2-16 2.6 Jumpers .............................................................................. 2-19 2.7 Connectors ......................................................................... 2-24
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 1 Onboard LED The motherboard comes with a standby power LED. The green LED lights up to indicate that the system is ON, in sleep mode, or in soft-off mode. This is a reminder that you should shut down the system and unplug the power cable before removing or plugging in any motherboard component. The illustration below shows the location of the onboard LED. 2.1 Before you proceed Take note of the following precautions before you install motherboard components or change any motherboard settings. ⢠Unplug the power cord from the wall socket before touching any component. ⢠Use a grounded wrist strap or touch a safely grounded object or a metal object, such as the power supply case, before handling components to avoid damaging them due to static electricity. ⢠Hold components by the edges to avoid touching the ICs on them. ⢠Whenever you uninstall any component, place it on a grounded antistatic pad or in the bag that came with the component. ⢠Before you install or remove any component, ensure that the power supply is switched off or the power cord is detached from the power supply. Failure to do so may cause severe damage to the motherboard, peripherals, and/or components. P5MT-MT/C Onboard LED SB_PWR1 OFF Powered Off ON Standby Power ® P5MT-MX/C
2 - 2 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2.2 Motherboard overview Before you install the motherboard, study the conï¬guration of your chassis to ensure that the motherboard ï¬ts into it. Refer to the chassis documentation before installing the motherboard. 2 . 2 . 1 P l a c e m e n t d i r e c t i o n When installing the motherboard, make sure that you place it into the chassis in the correct orientation. The edge with external ports goes to the rear part of the chassis as indicated in the image below. 2 . 2 . 2 S c r e w h o l e s Place eight (8) screws into the holes indicated by circles to secure the motherboard to the chassis. Do not overtighten the screws! Doing so can damage the motherboard. Make sure to unplug the chassis power cord before installing or removing the motherboard. Failure to do so can cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components. P l a c e t h i s s i d e t o w a r d s t h e r e a r o f t h e c h a s s i s ® P5MT-MX/C
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 3 2 . 2 . 3 M o t h e r b o a r d l a y o u t 24.5cm (9.6in) 24.5cm (9.6in) DDR2 DIMM_B1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A2 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B2 (64 bit,240-pin module) Intel E7230 Intel ICH7R PCIE1 PCI1 PCIE2 PCI2 ATI RageXL 8Mb FWH SUPER I/O Broadcd BCM5753 SB_PWR1 CR2032 3 Lithium Cell CMOS Powe ATX12V1 BUZZ1 KBPWR CPU_FAN2 CPU_FAN1 FM_CPU2 FM_CPU1 PRI_IDE1 FLOPPY1 ATXPWR1 SATA4 SATA3 SATA1 SATA2 FRNT_FAN1 FRNT_FAN2 USB56 USB34 HDLED1 BPSMB1 TRPWR1 USBPW34 USBPW56 USBPW78 RECOVERY1 RAID_SEL1 VGA_EN1 LAN_EN1 USBPW12 CLRTC1 CHASSIS1 J1 COM2 PANEL1 REAR_FAN1 REAR_FAN2 PS/2KBMS T : M o u se B: Keyboard USB12 COM1 P ARALLEL PORT VGA1 LAN1 ® P5MT-MX/C LGA775 USB78
2 - 4 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2 . 2 . 4 L a y o u t c o n t e n t s S o c k e t s / S l o t s P a g e 1. CPU socket 2-6 2. DDR2 DIMM sockets 2-13 3. PCI Express/PCI slots 2-18 J u m p e r s P a g e 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC1) 2-19 2. CPU fan pin selection (3-pin FM_CPU1, FM_CPU2) 2-20 3. USB device wake-up (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34, USBPW56, 2-20 USBPW78) 4. Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) 2-21 5. Gigabit LAN controller setting (3-pin LAN_EN1) 2-21 6. VGA graphics controller setting (3-pin VGA_EN1) 2-22 7. RAID select (3-pin RAID_SEL1) 2-22 8. BIOS recovery (3-pin RECOVERY1) 2-23 R e a r p a n e l c o n n e c t o r s P a g e 1. PS/2 mouse port (green) 2-24 2. Parallel port 2-24 3. PS/2 keyboard port (purple) 2-24 4. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2 2-24 5. Serial (COM1) port 2-24 6. VGA port 2-24 7. LAN (RJ-45) port 2-24
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 5 I n t e r n a l c o n n e c t o r s P a g e 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY1) 2-25 2. Hard disk activity LED connector (4-pin HDLED1) 2-25 3. IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1)) 2-26 4. Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) 2-27 5. CPU and system fan connectors (4-pin CPU_FAN1/CPU_FAN2, 3-pin REAR_FAN1/REAR_FAN2, FRNT_FAN1/FRNT_FAN2) 2-28 6. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM2) 2-28 7. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB34, USB56, USB78) 2-29 8. Backplane SMBus connector (6-1 pin BPSMB1) 2-29 9. SSI p owe r co nnec to rs (24-pin ATXPWR1, 4-pin ATX12V1) 2-30 10. Ambient thermal sensor connector (2-pin TRPWR1) 2-30 11. System panel connector (20-pin PANEL1) 2-31 ⢠System power LED (Green 3-pin POWERLED) ⢠Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin HDLED) ⢠System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPKROUT) ⢠ATX power button/soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin POWERBTN) ⢠Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESETBTN)
2 - 6 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2 . 3 . 1 I n s t a l l i n g t h e C P U To install a CPU: 1. Locate the CPU socket on the motherboard. 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) The motherboard comes with a surface mount LGA775 socket designed for the Intel ® Pentium ® 4 processor in the 775-land package. Before installing the CPU, make sure that the socket box is facing towards you and the load lever is on your left. ⢠Your boxed Intel ® Pentium ® 4 LGA775 processor package should come with installation instructions for the CPU and heatsink. If the instructions in this section do not match the CPU documentation, follow the latter. ⢠Upon purchase of the motherboard, make sure that the PnP cap is on the socket and the socket contacts are not bent. Contact your retailer immediately if the PnP cap is missing, or if you see any damage to the PnP cap/socket contacts/motherboard components. ASUS will shoulder the cost of repair only if the damage is shipment/ transit-related. ⢠Keep the cap after installing the motherboard. ASUS will process Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) requests only if the motherboard comes with the cap on the LGA775 socket. ⢠The product warranty does not cover damage to the socket contacts resulting from incorrect CPU installation/removal, or misplacement/loss/incorrect removal of the PnP cap. P5MT-MT/C CPU Socket 775 ® P5MT-MX/C
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 7 3. Lift the load lever in the direction of the arrow to a 135º angle. 4. Lift the load plate with your thumb and foreï¬nger to a 100º angle (A), then push the PnP cap from the load plate window to remove (B). To prevent damage to the socket pins, do not remove the PnP cap unless you are installing a CPU. 5. Position the CPU over the socket, making sure that the gold triangle is on the bottom-left corner of the socket. The socket alignment key should ï¬t into the CPU notch. A l i g n m e n t k e y G o l d t r i a n g l e m a r k L o a d p l a t e A B 2. Press the load lever with your thumb (A), then move it to the left (B) until it is released from the retention tab. R e t e n t i o n t a b L o a d l e v e r T h i s s i d e o f t h e s o c k e t b o x s h o u l d f a c e y o u . P n P c a p A B
2 - 8 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n ⢠This motherboard supports Intel ® Pentium ® 4 CPUs in the 775-land package with Hyper-Threading Technology. ⢠Hyper-Threading Technology is supported under Windows ® 2000 Server and Linux 2.4.x (kernel) and later versions only. Under Linux, use the Hyper-Threading compiler to compile the code. If you are using any other operating systems, disable the Hyper-Threading Technology item in the BIOS to ensure system stability and performance. ⢠We recommend that you install Wi nd ow s ® 2000 Server or later version. ⢠Make sure to enable the Hyper-Threading Technology item in BIOS before installing a supported operating system. ⢠For more information on Hyper-Threading Technology, visit www. intel.com/info/hyperthreading. To use the Hyper-Threading Technology on this motherboard: 1. Install an Intel ® Pentium ® 4 CPU that supports Hyper-Threading Technology. 2. Power up the system and enter the BIOS Setup (see Chapter 4: BIOS setup). Under the Advanced Menu, make sure that the item Hyper-Threading Technology is set to Enabled. The item appears only if you installed a CPU that supports Hyper-Threading Technology. 3. Reboot the computer. The CPU ï¬ts in only one correct orientation. DO NOT force the CPU into the socket to prevent bending the connectors on the socket and damaging the CPU! 6. Close the load plate (A), then push the load lever (B) until it snaps into the retention tab. A B N o t e s o n I n t e l ® H y p e r - T h r e a d i n g T e c h n o l o g y
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 9 F a s t e n e r M o t h e r b o a r d h o l e 2 . 3 . 2 I n s t a l l i n g t h e C P U h e a t s i n k a n d f a n The Intel ® Pentium ® 4 LGA775 processor requires a specially designed heatsink and fan assembly to ensure optimum thermal condition and performance. Make sure to orient each fastener with the narrow end of the groove pointing outward. (The photo shows the groove shaded for emphasis.) To install the CPU heatsink and fan: 1. Place the heatsink on top of the installed CPU, making sure that the four fasteners match the holes on the motherboard. N a r r o w e n d o f t h e g r o o v e Orient the heatsink and fan assembly such that the CPU fan cable is closest to the CPU fan connector. ⢠When you buy a boxed Intel ® Pentium ® 4 processor, the package includes the CPU fan and heatsink assembly. ⢠Your Intel ® Pentium ® 4 LGA775 heatsink and fan assembly comes in a push-pin design and requires no tool to install. ⢠If you purchased a separate CPU heatsink and fan assembly, make sure that you have properly applied Thermal Interface Material to the CPU heatsink or CPU before you install the heatsink and fan assembly. ⢠We recommend that you use Intel ® boxed multi-directional heatsink and fan only. ⢠Make sure that you have installed the motherboard to the chassis before you install the CPU fan and heatsink assembly.
2 - 1 0 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 3. Connect the CPU fan cable to the connector on the motherboard labeled CPU_FAN1/CPU_FAN2. ⢠Do not forget to connect the CPU fan connector! Hardware monitoring errors can occur if you fail to plug this connector. ⢠If there is only one CPU fan cable, connect it to the connector labeled CPU_FAN1. Failure to do so may cause hardware monitoring errors. 2. Push down two fasteners at a time in a diagonal sequence to secure the heatsink and fan assembly in place. B B A A A A B B P5M T-MX /C CP U Fa n Co nnec tors GND F ANP WR2 F A NOUT4 G ND F ANPWR 3 F ANO UT7 CP U_F A N1 CPU _F AN 2 ® P 5MT-M X/C
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 1 1 2 . 3 . 3 U n i n s t a l l i n g t h e C P U h e a t s i n k a n d f a n To uninstall the CPU heatsink and fan: 1. Disconnect the CPU fan cable from the connector on the motherboard. 2. Rotate each fastener counterclockwise. 3. Pull up two fasteners at a time in a diagonal sequence to disengage the heatsink and fan assembly from the motherboard. B B A A A A B B
2 - 1 2 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 4. Carefully remove the heatsink and fan assembly from the motherboard. 5. Rotate each fastener clockwise to ensure correct orientation when reinstalling. The narrow end of the groove should point outward after resetting. (The photo shows the groove shaded for emphasis.) N a r r o w e n d o f t h e g r o o v e
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 1 3 2.4 System memory 2 . 4 . 1 O v e r v i e w The motherboard comes with four Double Data Rate 2 (DDR2) Dual Inline Memory Modules (DIMM) sockets. A DDR2 module has the same physical dimensions as a DDR DIMM but has a 240-pin footprint compared to the 184-pin DDR DIMM. DDR2 DIMMs are notched to match the break on the socket and ensure correct installation. The ï¬gure illustrates the location of the DDR2 DIMM sockets: 2 . 4 . 2 M e m o r y c o n f i g u r a t i o n s You may install 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB and 2 GB unbuffered ECC/non-ECC DDR2 533/667 MHz DIMMs into the DIMM sockets. P5MT-MX/C 240-pin DDR2 DIMM Sockets DIMM_A2 DIMM_B1 DIMM_B2 DIMM_A1 1 12 Pins 128 Pins ® P5MT-MX/C ⢠Always install DIMMs with the same CAS latency. For optimum compatibility, it is recommended that you obtain memory modules from the same vendor. Refer to the DDR2 Qualiï¬ed Vendors List at the ASUS web site. ⢠When installing one or two DIMMs, install the DIMM(s) to the blue slots (DIMM_A2/DIMM_B2). ⢠Three DDR2 DIMMs intalled into any three memory sockets will function in single-channel mode.
2 - 1 4 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n R e c o m m e n d e d m e m o r y c o n f i g u r a t i o n s * U s e o n l y i d e n t i c a l D D R 2 D I M M p a i r s . S o c k e t s M o d e D I M M _ A 1 D I M M _ A 2 D I M M _ B 1 D I M M _ B 2 ( b l u e ) ( b l a c k ) ( b l u e ) ( b l a c k ) Single-channel (1) Installed â â â Dual-channel* (1) Installed â Installed â (2) Installed Installed Installed Installed M i c r o s o f t ® O S m e m o r y s u p p o r t Refer to the table below for the maximum memory support information on various Microsoft ® operating systems. M i c r o s o f t ® o p e r a t i n g s y s t e m M a x i m u m p h y s i c a l m e m o r y s u p p o r t e d Windows ® 2000 Professional 4 GB Windows ® 2000 Server 4 GB Windows ® 2000 Advanced Server 8 GB Windows ® 2000 Datacenter Server 32 GB Windows ® Server 2003 Web Edition 2 GB Windows ® Server 2003 Standard Edition 4 GB Windows ® Server 2003 Enterprise Edition 32 GB Windows ® Server 2003 Datacenter Edition 64 GB Windows ® Server 2003 Enterprise 64-bit Edition 32 GB Windows ® Server 2003 Datacenter 64-bit Edition 1 TB The memory support information was gathered from various public Microsoft ® web pages.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 1 5 2 . 4 . 3 I n s t a l l i n g a D I M M To install a DIMM: 1. Unlock a DIMM socket by pressing the retaining clips outward. 2. Align a DIMM on the socket such that the notch on the DIMM matches the break on the socket. 3. Firmly insert the DIMM into the socket until the retaining clips snap back in place and the DIMM is properly seated. ⢠A DDR2 DIMM is keyed with a notch so that it ï¬ts in only one direction. Do not force a DIMM into a socket to avoid damaging the DIMM. ⢠The DDR2 DIMM sockets do not support DDR DIMMs. DO not install DDR DIMMs to the DDR2 DIMM sockets. Unplug the power supply before adding or removing DIMMs or other system components. Failure to do so can cause severe damage to both the motherboard and the components. 2 U n l o c k e d r e t a i n i n g c l i p D D R 2 D I M M n o t c h 1 3 2 . 4 . 4 R e m o v i n g a D I M M Follow these steps to remove a DIMM. 1. Simultaneously press the retaining clips outward to unlock the DIMM. 2. Remove the DIMM from the socket. Support the DIMM lightly with your ï¬ngers when pressing the retaining clips. The DIMM might get damaged when it ï¬ips out with extra force. D D R 2 D I M M n o t c h 1 2 1
2 - 1 6 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2.5 Expansion slots In the future, you may need to install expansion cards. The following sub-sections describe the slots and the expansion cards that they support. 2 . 5 . 1 I n s t a l l i n g a n e x p a n s i o n c a r d To install an expansion card: 1. Before installing the expansion card, read the documentation that came with it and make the necessary hardware settings for the card. 2. Remove the system unit cover (if your motherboard is already installed in a chassis). 3. Remove the bracket opposite the slot that you intend to use. Keep the screw for later use. 4. Align the card connector with the slot and press ï¬rmly until the card is completely seated on the slot. 5. Secure the card to the chassis with the screw you removed earlier. 6. Replace the system cover. 2 . 5 . 2 C o n f i g u r i n g a n e x p a n s i o n c a r d After installing the expansion card, conï¬gure the it by adjusting the software settings. 1. Turn on the system and change the necessary BIOS settings, if any. See Chapter 4 for information on BIOS setup. 2. Assign an IRQ to the card. Refer to the tables on the next page. 3. Install the software drivers for the expansion card. Make sure to unplug the power cord before adding or removing expansion cards. Failure to do so may cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components. When using PCI cards on shared slots, ensure that the drivers support âShare IRQâ or that the cards do not need IRQ assignments. Otherwise, conï¬icts will arise between the two PCI groups, making the system unstable and the card inoperable.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 1 7 2 . 5 . 3 I n t e r r u p t a s s i g n m e n t s I R Q P r i o r i t y S t a n d a r d F u n c t i o n 0 1 System Timer 1 2 Keyboard Controller 2 â Re-direct to IRQ #9 3 11 Communications Port (COM2)* 4 12 Communications Port (COM1)* 5 13 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 6 14 Floppy Disk Controller 7 15 Printer Port (LPT1)* 8 3 System CMOS/Real Time Clock 9 4 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 10 5 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 11 6 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 12 7 PS/2 Compatible Mouse Port* 13 8 Numeric Data Processor 14 9 Primary IDE Channel 15 10 Secondary IDE Channel * T h e s e I R Q s a r e u s u a l l y a v a i l a b l e f o r I S A o r P C I d e v i c e s . D e s c r i p t i o n I N T A I N T B I N T C I N T D R E Q # G N T # PCI slot 1 PIRQE# PIRQF# PIRQG# PIRQH# REQ0# GNT0# PCI slot 2 PIRQG# PIRQH# PIRQE# PIRQF# REQ1# GNT1# PCI E x16 slot PIRQA# PIRQB# PIRQC# PIRQD# PCI E x 8 slot PIRQA# PIRQB# PIRQC# PIRQD# Onboard USB controller 0 PIRQA# Onboard USB controller 1 PIRQB# Onboard USB controller 2 PIRQC# Onboard USB controller 3 PIRQD# USB 2.0 EHCI co n t ro l l er PIRQA# Onboard IDE port PIRQC# Onboard SATA port PIRQD# Onboard Graphics Controller PIRQE# REQ2# GNT2# SMBus Controller PIRQD# Onboard LAN PIRQB# When using PCI cards on shared slots, ensure that the drivers support âShare IRQâ or that the cards do not need IRQ assignments; otherwise, conï¬icts will arise between the two PCI groups, making the system unstable and the card inoperable. S t a n d a r d i n t e r r u p t a s s i g n m e n t s P C I B u s N u m b e r , I D S E L , a n d I R Q a s s i g n m e n t s
2 - 1 8 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2 . 5 . 6 P C I s l o t s The PCI slots support cards such as a LAN card, SCSI card, USB card, and other cards that comply with PCI 2.3 speciï¬cations. The ï¬gure shows a LAN card installed on a 32-bit PCI slot. 2 . 5 . 5 P C I E x p r e s s x 8 s l o t This motherboard supports PCI Express x8 network cards, SCSI cards, and other cards that comply with PCI Express 1.0a speciï¬cations. P C I E x p r e s s x 8 s l o t 2 . 5 . 4 P C I E x p r e s s x 1 6 s l o t This motherboard supports PCI Express x16 graphics cards that comply with the PCI Express speciï¬cations. The following ï¬gure shows a graphics card installed on the PCI Express x16 slot. A PCI Express graphics card may run only at x1 speed due to chipset limitation.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 1 9 1 . C l e a r R T C R A M ( C L R T C 1 ) This jumper allows you to clear the Real Time Clock (RTC) RAM in CMOS. You can clear the CMOS memory of system setup parameters by erasing the CMOS RTC RAM data. The onboard button cell battery powers the RAM data in CMOS, which include system setup information such as system passwords. To erase the RTC RAM: 1. Turn OFF the computer and unplug the power cord. 2. Remove the onboard battery. 3. Move the jumper cap from pins 1-2 (default) to pins 2-3. Keep the cap on pins 2-3 for about 5~10 seconds, then move the cap back to pins 1-2. 4. Re-install the battery. 5. Plug the power cord and turn ON the computer. 6. Hold down the <Del> key during the boot process and enter BIOS setup to re-enter data. Except when clearing the RTC RAM, never remove the cap on CLRTC jumper default position. Removing the cap will cause system boot failure! 2.6 Jumpers P5MT-MX/C Clear RTC RAM CLRTC1 Normal (Default) Clear CMOS 2 1 3 2 ® P5MT-MX/C
2 - 2 0 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 3 . U S B d e v i c e w a k e - u p ( 3 - p i n U S B P W 1 2 , U S B P W 3 4 , U S B P W 5 6 , U S B P W 7 8 ) Set these jumpers to 5V to wake up the computer from S1 sleep mode (CPU stopped, DRAM refreshed, system running in low power mode) using the connected USB devices. Set to 5VSB to wake up from S4 sleep mode (no power to CPU and DRAM, power supply in reduced power mode). ⢠The USB device wake-up feature requires a power supply that can provide 500mA on the 5VSB lead for each USB port; otherwise, the system would not power up. ⢠The total current consumed must NOT exceed the power supply capability ( 5VSB) whether under normal condition or in sleep mode. 2 . C P U f a n p i n s e l e c t i o n ( 3 - p i n F M _ C P U 1 , F M _ C P U 2 ) These jumpers allow you to connect either a 3-pin or a 4-pin fan cable plug to the CPU fan connectors (CPU_FAN1, CPU_FAN2). Set these jumpers to pins 1-2 if you are using a 3-pin fan cable plug, or to pins 2-3 if you are using a 4-pin plug. ® P5MT-MX/C P5MT-MX/C USB Device Wake-Up USBPW12 (Default) 5V 5VSB 3 2 2 1 USBPW78 (Default) 5V 5VSB 3 2 2 1 USBPW56 (Default) 5V 5VSB 2 1 3 2 USBPW34 (Default) 5V 5VSB 2 1 3 2 P5MT-MX/C FM CPU Setting FM_CPU1 FM_CPU2 2 1 3 2 3-pin fan 4-pin fan (Default) 2 3 2 1 3-pin fan 4-pin fan (Default) ® P5MT-MX/C
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 2 1 4 . K e y b o a r d p o w e r ( 3 - p i n K B P W R 1 ) Thi s ju mpe r a llo ws y ou to enab le or dis able th e k eybo ard wa ke- up fea ture . S et thi s ju mpe r t o pi ns 2-3 ( 5VS B) t o w ake up the co mpu ter whe n yo u p res s a key on th e ke ybo ard (th e d efa ult is the Sp ace Bar ). Thi s fe atu re req uire s a n A TX p owe r s upp ly t hat ca n su ppl y a t l east 1A on the 5V SB lea d, a nd a c orr espo ndi ng sett ing in the BI OS. 5 . G i g a b i t L A N c o n t r o l l e r s e t t i n g ( 3 - p i n L A N _ E N 1 ) This jumper allows you to enable or disable the onboard Broadcom BCM5753 Gigabit LAN controller. Set to pins 1-2 to activate the Gigabit LAN feature. ® P5MT-MX/C P5MT-MX/C Keyboard Power Setting KBPWR1 (Default) 5V 5VSB 2 3 1 2 P5MT-MX/C LAN_EN1 Setting Enable (Default) Disable LAN_EN1 2 1 2 3 ® P5MT-MX/C
2 - 2 2 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 6 . V G A g r a p h i c s c o n t r o l l e r s e t t i n g ( 3 - p i n V G A _ E N 1 ) This jumper allows you to enable or disable the onboard ATI Rage XL video graphics controller. Set to pins 1-2 to enable the video graphics controller. Make sure to set this jumper to Disable if you want to install VGA cards on the PCI and PCI Express slots. P5MT-MX/C VGA Setting VGA_EN1 Enable (Default) Disable 2 1 2 3 ® P5MT-MX/C 7 . R A I D s e l e c t s e t t i n g ( 3 - p i n R A I D _ S E L 1 ) Set this jumper to 1-2 (Default) to enable LSI RAID ROM. Set this jumper to 2-3 to enable Intel ® RAID ROM. RAID_SEL1 LSI RAID ROM (Default) INTEL RAID ROM 2 1 2 3 P5MT-MX/C RAID_SEL1 Setting ® P5MT-MX/C
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 2 3 8 . B I O S r e c o v e r y ( 3 - p i n R E C O V E R Y 1 ) This jumper allows you to recover your original BIOS from a ï¬oppy disk in case the BIOS codes and data get corrupted. To recover the BIOS: 1. Turn OFF your computer and unplug the power cord. 2. Move the jumper cap from pins 1-2 (default) to pins 2-3. 3. Insert a ï¬oppy disk with the original or updated BIOS ï¬ le. 4. Plug the power cord and turn ON the computer. 5. The system searches for the BIOS ï¬ le in the ï¬oppy then reï¬ashes the BIOS. 6. When ï¬nished, shut down your computer. 7. Replace the jumper cap from pins 2-3 to pins 1-2. 8. Reboot your computer. 9. Hold down the <Del> key during the boot process and enter BIOS setup to re-enter data. ® P5MT-MX/C P5MT-MX/C BIOS Recovery Setting RECOVERY1 (Default) Normal BIOS recovery 2 3 2 1
2 - 2 4 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2.7 Connectors 2 . 7 . 1 R e a r p a n e l c o n n e c t o r s 1. PS/2 mouse port (green). This port is for a PS/2 mouse. 2. Parallel port. This 25-pin port connects a parallel printer, a scanner, or other devices. 3. PS/2 keyboard port (purple). This port is for a PS/2 keyboard. 4. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. These two 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. 5. Serial (COM1) port. This 9-pin communication port is for pointing devices or other serial devices. 6. Video Graphics Adapter (VGA) port. This port is for a VGA monitor or other VGA-compatible devices. 7. LAN (RJ-45) port. This port allows Gigabit connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) through a network hub. Refer to the table below for the LAN port LED indications. 1 3 6 5 7 4 2 A C T / L I N K L E D S P E E D L E D S t a t u s D e s c r i p t i o n S t a t u s D e s c r i p t i o n OFF No link OFF 10 Mbps connection GREEN Linked RED 100 Mbps connection BLINKING Data activity GREEN 1 Gbps connection L A N p o r t L E D i n d i c a t i o n s L A N p o r t S P E E D L E D A C T / L I N K L E D
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 2 5 2 . 7 . 2 I n t e r n a l c o n n e c t o r s 1 . F l o p p y d i s k d r i v e c o n n e c t o r ( 3 4 - 1 p i n F L O P P Y 1 ) This connector is for the provided ï¬oppy disk drive (FDD) signal cable. Insert one end of the cable to this connector, then connect the other end to the signal connector at the back of the ï¬oppy disk drive. Pin 5 on the connector is removed to prevent incorrect cable connection when using a FDD cable with a covered Pin 5. 2 . H a r d d i s k a c t i v i t y L E D c o n n e c t o r ( 4 - p i n H D L E D 1 ) This connector supplies power to the hard disk activity LED for add-on cards such as SCSI or RAID cards. The read/write activities of the add-on cards cause the hard disk activity LED to light up. NOTE: Ori ent the red markings on the floppy ribbon cable to PIN 1. P5MT-MX/C Floppy Disk Drive Connector FLOPPY1 PIN 1 ® P5MT-MX/C P5MT-MX/C SCSI/SA T A Card Activity LED Connector HDLED1 1 ADD_IN_CARD_ACT# NC ADD_IN_CARD_ACT# NC ® P5MT-MX/C
2 - 2 6 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 3 . I D E c o n n e c t o r ( 4 0 - 1 p i n P R I _ I D E 1 ) This connector is for an Ultra DMA 100/66 signal cable. The Ultra DMA 100/66 signal cable has one connector: a blue connector for the primary IDE connector on the motherboard, a black connector for an Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE slave device (optical drive/hard disk drive), and a gray connector for an Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE master device (hard disk drive). If you install two hard disk drives, you must conï¬gure the second drive as a slave device by setting its jumper accordingly. Refer to the hard disk documentation for the jumper settings. ⢠Pin 20 on the IDE connector is removed to match the covered hole on the Ultra DMA cable connector. This prevents incorrect insertion when you connect the IDE cable. ⢠Use the 80-conductor IDE cable for Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE devices. P5MT-MX/C IDE Connector NOTE: Orient the red markings (usually zigzag) on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. PRI_IDE1 PI N 1 ® P5MT-MX/C
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 2 7 4 . S e r i a l A T A c o n n e c t o r s ( 7 - p i n S A T A 1 , S A T A 2 , S A T A 3 , S A T A 4 ) These connectors are for the Serial ATA signal cables for Serial ATA hard disk drives. If you installed Serial ATA hard disk drives, you can create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, or RAID 10 conï¬guration with the onboard Intel ® ICH7R RAID controller. Thes e c onne ctor s a re s et t o St anda rd I DE mode by def ault . In Sta ndar d IDE mode, you can connect Serial ATA boot/data hard disk drives to these connectors. If you intend to create a Serial ATA RAID set using these connectors, set the Conï¬ gure SAT A a s item in the BIOS to [RAID]. See section â4.3.5 IDE Conï¬gurationâ for details. When using the connectors in Standard IDE mode, connect the primary (boot) hard disk drive to the SATA1 or SATA2 connector. Refer to the table below for the recommended SATA hard disk drive connections. P5MT-MX/C SA T A Connectors SA T A 1 GN D RS A TA _T XP 3 RS A TA _T XN 3 GN D RS A TA _R XP 3 RS A TA _R XN 3 GN D GN D RS A TA _T XP 3 RS A TA _T XN 3 GN D RS A TA _R XP 3 RS A TA _R XN 3 GN D GN D RS A TA _T XP 3 RS A TA _T XN 3 GN D RS A TA _R XP 3 RS A TA _R XN 3 GN D GN D RS A TA _T XP 3 RS A TA _T XN 3 GN D RS A TA _R XP 3 RS A TA _R XN 3 GN D SATA2 SATA3 SATA4 ® P5MT-MX/C S e r i a l A T A h a r d d i s k d r i v e c o n n e c t i o n C o n n e c t o r S e t t i n g U s e SATA1/SATA2 Master Boot disk SATA3/SATA4 Slave Data disk
2 - 2 8 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 6 . S e r i a l p o r t c o n n e c t o r ( 1 0 - 1 p i n C O M 2 ) This connector is for a serial (COM2) port. Connect the serial port module cable to this connector, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. 5 . C P U a n d s y s t e m f a n c o n n e c t o r s ( 4 - p i n C P U _ F A N 1 / 2 , 3 - p i n R E A R _ F A N 1 / 2 , 3 - p i n F R N T _ F A N 1 / 2 ) The fan co nne ctor s s upp ort coo lin g f ans of 350 mA ~ 740 mA (8.88 W max.) or a total of 2.1 A ~ 4.44 A (53.28 W max.) at 12V. Connect the fan cables to the fan connectors on the motherboard, making sure that the black wire of each cable matches the ground pin of the connector. Do not forget to connect the fan cables to the fan connectors. Insufï¬cient air ï¬ow inside the system may damage the motherboard components. These are not jumpers! Do not place jumper caps on the fan connectors! ® P5MT-MX/C P5MT-MX/C Fan Connectors REAR_F AN2 REAR_F AN1 FRNT_F AN1 FRNT_FAN2 GND F ANPWR3 F ANOUT7 GND F ANPWR2 F ANOUT4 CPU_F AN2 CPU_F AN1 GND Rotation 12V GND Rotation 12V GND Rotation 12V GND Rotation 12V CPU_FAN1 CPU_FAN2 REAR_FAN1 REAR_FAN2 FRNT_FAN1 FRNT_FAN2 P5MT-MX/C Serial Port (COM2) Connector PIN 1 COM2 ® P5MT-MX/C
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 2 9 7 . U S B c o n n e c t o r s ( 1 0 - 1 p i n U S B 3 4 , U S B 5 6 , U S B 7 8 ) These connectors are for USB 2.0 ports. Connect the USB module cable to this connector, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. The USB connectors comply with USB 2.0 speciï¬cation that supports up to 480 Mbps connection speed. Never connect a 1394 cable to the USB connectors. Doing so will damage the motherboard! ® P5MT-MX/C USB 5V USB 5V USB_P4- USB_P5- USB_P4 USB_P5 GND GND NC P5MT-MX/C USB 2.0 Connectors USB34 USB 5V USB 5V USB_P3- USB_P2- USB_P3 USB_P2 GND GND NC USB56 USB 5V USB_P7- USB_P7 GND NC USB78 USB 5V USB_P6- USB_P6 GND 8 . B a c k p l a n e S M B u s c o n n e c t o r ( 6 - 1 p i n B P S M B 1 ) This connector allows you to connect SMBus (System Management Bus) devices. Devices communicate with an SMBus host and/or other SMBus devices using the SMBus interface. P5MT-MX/C SMBus Connector BPSMB1 1 I2C_CLK GND I2C_DA T A 5V F ANOUT ® P5MT-MX/C
2 - 3 0 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 9 . S S I p o w e r c o n n e c t o r s ( 2 4 - p i n A T X P W R 1 , 4 - p i n A T X 1 2 V 1 ) These connectors are for SSI power supply plugs. The power supply plugs are designed to ï¬t these connectors in only one orientation. Find the proper orientation and push down ï¬rmly until the connectors completely ï¬t. ⢠Use of an SSI 12 V Speciï¬cation 2.0-compliant power supply unit (PSU) that provides a minimum power of 450 W is recommended for a fully-conï¬gured system. ⢠Do not forget to connect the 4-p in ATX12V1 power plug; otherwise, the system will not boot up. ⢠Use of a PSU with a higher power output is recommended when conï¬guring a system with more power consuming devices. The system may become unstable or may not boot up if the power is inadequate. ⢠You must install a PSU with a higher power rating if you intend to install additional devices. P5MT-MX/C ATX Power Connectors 24-pin Power Connector A TXPWR1 3 V olts 3 V olts Ground 5 V olts 5 V olts Ground Ground Power OK 5V Standby 12 V olts -5 V olts 5 V olts 3 V olts -12 V olts Ground Ground Ground PSON# Ground 5 V olts 12 V olts 3 V olts 5 V olts 1 Ground A TX12V1 12V DC GND 12V DC GND ® P5MT-MX/C 1 0 . A m b i e n t t h e r m a l s e n s o r c o n n e c t o r ( 2 - p i n T R P W R 1 ) If you want additional thermal monitoring, connect the thermal sensor cable with a thermistor (of 1ºK or at 25ºC, B=3435) to this connector. P5MT-MX/C TRPWR Connector TRPWR1 SYS-THEAMAL2 GND ® P5MT-MX/C
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 3 1 ⢠System power LED (Green 3-pin POWERLED) This 3-pin connector is for the system power LED. Connect the chassis power LED cable to this connector. The system power LED lights up when you turn on the system power, and blinks when the system is in sleep mode. ⢠Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin HDLED) This 2-pin connector is for the HDD Activity LED. Connect the HDD Activity LED cable to this connector. The IDE LED lights up or ï¬ashes when data is read from or written to the HDD. ⢠System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPKROUT) This 4-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted system warning speaker. The speaker allows you to hear system beeps and warnings. ⢠ATX power button/soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin POWERBTN) This connector is for the system power button. Pressing the power button turns the system on or puts the system in sleep or soft-off mode depending on the BIOS settings. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds while the system is ON turns the system OFF. ⢠Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESETBTN) This 2-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted reset button for system reboot without turning off the system power. 1 1 . S y s t e m p a n e l c o n n e c t o r ( 2 0 - p i n P A N E L 1 ) This connector supports several chassis-mounted functions. The sytem panel connector is color-coded for easy connection. ® P5MT-MX/C P5MT-MX/C System Panel Connector P ANEL1 3VSB GND POWERBTN# 5V GND GND NC HDLED MLED NMIBTN# GND RESETBTN# SPEAKER GND FP_ GND NC PLED FP_ FP_ FP_ NC 5V
2 - 3 2 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n
3 Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence, the vocal POST messages, and ways of shutting down the system.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C Chapter summary 3 3.1 Starting up for the ï¬rst time ................................................ 3-1 3.2 Powering off the computer ................................................... 3-2
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 3 - 1 3.1 Starting up for the ï¬rst time 1. After making all the connections, replace the system case cover. 2. Be sure that all switches are off. 3. Connect the power cord to the power connector at the back of the system chassis. 4. Connect the power cord to a power outlet that is equipped with a surge protector. 5. Turn on the devices in the following order: a. Monitor b. External SCSI devices (starting with the last device on the chain) c. System power 6. After applying power, the system power LED on the system front panel case lights up. For systems with ATX power supplies, the system LED lights up when you press the ATX power button. If your monitor complies with âgreenâ standards or if it has a âpower standbyâ feature, the monitor LED may light up or switch between orange and green after the system LED turns on. The system then runs the Power-On Self-Test (POST). While the tests are running, the BIOS beeps or additional messages appear on the screen. If you do not see anything within 30 seconds from the time you turned on the power, the system may have failed a power-on test. Check the jumper settings and connections or call your retailer for assistance. 7. At power on, hold down the <Del> key to enter the BIOS Setup. Follow the instructions in Chapter 4. A M I B I O S b e e p c o d e s B e e p D e s c r i p t i o n E r r o r One beep Keyboard controller error Refresh Time error No master drive detected Two continuous beeps followed by Floppy controller failure two short beeps Two continuous beeps followed by Hardware component failure four short beeps
3 - 2 C h a p t e r 3 : P o w e r i n g u p 3.2 Powering off the computer 3 . 2 . 1 U s i n g t h e O S s h u t d o w n f u n c t i o n If you are using Windows ® Server 2000: 1. Click the Start button then click Shut Down... 2. Make sure that the Shut Down option button is selected, then click the OK button to shut down the computer. 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows ® shuts down. If you are using Windows ® Server 2003: 1. Click the Start button then select Turn Off Computer. 2. Click the Turn Off button to shut down the computer. 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows ® shuts down. 3 . 2 . 2 U s i n g t h e d u a l f u n c t i o n p o w e r s w i t c h While the system is ON, pressing the power switch for less than four seconds puts the system to sleep mode or to soft-off mode, depending on the BIOS setting. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds lets the system enter the soft-off mode regardless of the BIOS setting. Refer to section â4.5 Power Menuâ in Chapter 4 for details
4 BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change the system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C Chapter summary 4 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ........................................ 4-1 4.2 BIOS setup program ............................................................ 4-10 4.3 Main menu ........................................................................... 4-13 4.4 Advanced menu .................................................................. 4-18 4.5 Power menu ........................................................................ 4-27 4.6 Boot menu .......................................................................... 4-31 4.7 Exit menu ............................................................................ 4-35
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 1 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS The following utilities allow you to manage and update the motherboard Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) setup. 1. ASUS AFUDOS (Updates the BIOS in DOS mode using a bootable ï¬oppy disk.) 2. ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 (Updates the BIOS using a bootable ï¬oppy disk or the motherboard support CD when the BIOS ï¬le fails or gets corrupted.) 3. ASUS Update (Updates the BIOS in Windows ® environment.) Refer to the corresponding sections for details on these utilities. 4 . 1 . 1 C r e a t i n g a b o o t a b l e f l o p p y d i s k 1. Do either one of the following to create a bootable ï¬oppy disk. DOS environment a. Insert a 1.44 MB ï¬oppy disk into the drive. b. At the DOS prompt, type format A:/S then press <Enter>. Windows ® XP environment a. Insert a 1.44 MB ï¬oppy disk to the ï¬oppy disk drive. b. Click Start from the Windows ® desktop, then select My Computer. c. Select the 3 1/2 Floppy Drive icon. d. Click File from the menu, then select Format. A Format 3 1/2 Floppy Disk window appears. e. Windows ® XP users: Select Create an MS-DOS startup disk from the format options ï¬eld, then click Start. 2. Copy the original or the latest motherboard BIOS ï¬le to the bootable ï¬oppy disk. Save a copy of the original motherboard BIOS ï¬le to a bootable ï¬oppy disk in case you need to restore the BIOS in the future. Copy the original motherboard BIOS using the ASUS Update or AFUDOS utilities.
4 - 2 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4 . 1 . 2 A F U D O S u t i l i t y The AFUDOS utility allows you to update the BIOS ï¬le in DOS environment using a bootable ï¬oppy disk with the updated BIOS ï¬le. This utility also allows you to copy the current BIOS ï¬le that you can use as backup when the BIOS fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. C o p y i n g t h e c u r r e n t B I O S To copy the current BIOS ï¬le using the AFUDOS utility: 1. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable ï¬oppy disk you created earlier. 2. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /o[ï¬lename] where the [ï¬lename] is any user-assigned ï¬lename not more than eight alphanumeric characters for the main ï¬lename and three alphanumeric characters for the extension name. ⢠Make sure that the ï¬oppy disk is not write-protected and has at least 1024 KB free space to save the ï¬le. ⢠The succeeding BIOS screens are for reference only. The actual BIOS screen displays may not be same as shown. M a i n f i l e n a m e E x t e n s i o n n a m e A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom The utility returns to the DOS prompt after copying the current BIOS ï¬le. 3. Press <Enter>. The utility copies the current BIOS ï¬le to the ï¬oppy disk. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom AM I F ir mwa re Up da te Uti li ty - Ver si on 1. 19( AS US V2. 07 (03 .1 1.2 4B B)) Cop yrigh t (C ) 2 00 2 A me ric an Me gatre nds, Inc. All rig ht s r es erv ed . Reading ï¬ash ..... done Write to ï¬le...... ok A:\>
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 3 2. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable ï¬oppy disk you created earlier. 3. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /i[ï¬lename] where [ï¬lename] is the latest or the original BIOS ï¬le on the bootable ï¬oppy disk. U p d a t i n g t h e B I O S f i l e To update the BIOS ï¬le using the AFUDOS utility: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) and download the latest BIOS ï¬le for the motherboard. Save the BIOS ï¬le to a bootable ï¬oppy disk. A:\>afudos /iP5MT-MXC.ROM Write the BIOS ï¬lename on a piece of paper. You need to type the exact BIOS ï¬lename at the DOS prompt. A:\>afudos /iP5MT-MXC.ROM AM I F ir mwa re Up da te Uti li ty - Ver si on 1. 19( AS US V2. 07 (03 .1 1.2 4B B)) Cop yrigh t (C ) 2 00 2 A me ric an Me gatre nds, Inc. All rig ht s r es erv ed . WARNING!! Do not turn off power during ï¬ash BIOS Reading ï¬le ....... done Reading ï¬ash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing ï¬ash ...... done Writing ï¬ash ...... 0x0008CC00 (9%) 4. The utility veriï¬es the ï¬le and starts updating the BIOS. Do not shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure!
4 - 4 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 5. The utility returns to the DOS prompt after the BIOS update process is completed. Reboot the system from the hard disk drive. A:\>afudos /iP5MT-MXC.ROM AM I F ir mwa re Up da te Uti li ty - Ver si on 1. 19( AS US V2. 07 (03 .1 1.2 4B B)) Cop yrigh t (C ) 2 00 2 A me ric an Me gatre nds, Inc. All rig ht s r es erv ed . WARNING!! Do not turn off power during ï¬ash BIOS Reading ï¬le ....... done Reading ï¬ash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing ï¬ash ...... done Writing ï¬ash ...... done Verifying ï¬ash .... done Please restart your computer A:\>
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 5 4 . 1 . 3 A S U S C r a s h F r e e B I O S 2 u t i l i t y The ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 is an auto recovery tool that allows you to restore the BIOS ï¬le when it fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. You can update a corrupted BIOS ï¬le using the motherboard support CD or the ï¬oppy disk that contains the updated BIOS ï¬le. R e c o v e r i n g t h e B I O S f r o m a f l o p p y d i s k To recover the BIOS from a ï¬oppy disk: 1. Turn on the system. 2. Insert the ï¬oppy disk with the original or updated BIOS ï¬le to the ï¬oppy disk drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the ï¬oppy disk for the original or updated BIOS ï¬le. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for ï¬oppy... 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for ï¬oppy... Floppy found! Reading ï¬le âP5MT-MXC.ROMâ. Completed. Start ï¬ashing... When found, the utility reads the BIOS ï¬le and starts ï¬ashing the corrupted BIOS ï¬le. DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! ⢠Prepare the motherboard support CD or the ï¬oppy disk containing the updated motherboard BIOS before using this utility. ⢠Make sure that you rename the original or updated BIOS ï¬le in the ï¬oppy disk to P5MT-MXC.ROM.
4 - 6 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p The recovered BIOS may not be the latest BIOS version for this motherboard. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS ï¬le. R e c o v e r i n g t h e B I O S f r o m t h e s u p p o r t C D To recover the BIOS from the support CD: 1. Remove any ï¬oppy disk from the ï¬oppy disk drive, then turn on the system. 2. Insert the support CD to the optical drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the ï¬oppy disk for the original or updated BIOS ï¬le. 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for ï¬oppy... Floppy not found! Checking for CD-ROM... CD-ROM found! Reading ï¬le âP5MT-MXC.ROMâ. Completed. Start ï¬ashing... When no ï¬oppy disk is found, the utility automatically checks the optical drive for the original or updated BIOS ï¬le. The utility then updates the corrupted BIOS ï¬le. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for ï¬oppy...
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 7 4 . 1 . 4 A S U S U p d a t e u t i l i t y The ASUS Update is a utility that allows you to manage, save, and update the motherboard BIOS in Windows ® environment. The ASUS Update utility allows you to: ⢠Save the current BIOS file ⢠Download the latest BIOS file from the Internet ⢠Update the BIOS from an updated BIOS file ⢠Update the BIOS directly from the Internet, and ⢠View the BIOS version information. This utility is available in the support CD that comes with the motherboard package. ASUS Update requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP). I n s t a l l i n g A S U S U p d a t e To install ASUS Update: 1. Place the support CD in the optical drive. The Drivers menu appears. 2. Click the Utilities tab, then click Install ASUS Update VX.XX.XX. 3. The ASUS Update utility is copied to your system. Quit all Windows ® applications before you update the BIOS using this utility.
4 - 8 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 3. Select the ASUS FTP site nearest you to avoid network trafï¬c, or click Auto Select. Click Next. U p d a t i n g t h e B I O S t h r o u g h t h e I n t e r n e t To update the BIOS through the Internet: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows ® desktop by clicking Start > Programs > ASUS > ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate. The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from the Internet option from the drop-down menu, then click Next.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 9 U p d a t i n g t h e B I O S t h r o u g h a B I O S f i l e To update the BIOS through a BIOS ï¬le: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows ® desktop by clicking Start > Programs > ASUS > ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate. The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from a ï¬le option from the drop-down menu, then click Next. 4. From the FTP site, select the BIOS version that you wish to download. Click Next. 5. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process. The ASUS Update utility is capable of updating itself through the Internet. Always update the utility to avail of all its features. 3. Locate the BIOS ï¬le from the Open window, then click Save. 4. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process.
4 - 1 0 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4.2 BIOS setup program This motherboard supports a programmable ï¬rmware chip that you can update using the provided utility described in section â4.1 Managing and updating your BIOSâ. Use the BIOS Setup program when you are installing a motherboard, reconï¬guring your system, or prompted to âRun Setupâ. This section explains how to conï¬gure your system using this utility. Even if you are not prompted to use the Setup program, you can change the conï¬guration of your computer in the future. For example, you can enable the security password feature or change the power management settings. This requires you to reconï¬gure your system using the BIOS Setup program so that the computer can recognize these changes and record them in the CMOS RAM of the ï¬rmware hub. The ï¬rmware hub on the motherboard stores the Setup utility. When you start up the computer, the system provides you with the opportunity to run this program. Press <Del> during the Power-On Self-Test (POST) to enter the Setup utility; otherwise, POST continues with its test routines. If you wish to enter Setup after POST, restart the system by pressing <Ctrl> <Alt> <Del>, or by pressing the reset button on the system chassis. You can also restart by turning the system off and then back on. Do this last option only if the ï¬rst two failed. The Setup program is designed to make it as easy to use as possible. Being a menu-driven program, it lets you scroll through the various sub-menus and make your selections from the available options using the navigation keys. ⢠The default BIOS settings for this motherboard apply for most conditions to ensure optimum performance. If the system becomes unstable after changing any BIOS settings, load the default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability. Select the Load Setup Defaults item under the Exit Menu. See section â4.7 Exit Menu.â ⢠The BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference purposes only, and may not exactly match what you see on your screen. ⢠Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS ï¬le for this motherboard.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 1 1 4 . 2 . 2 M e n u b a r The menu bar on top of the screen has the following main items: Main For changing the basic system conï¬guration Advanced For changing the advanced system settings Power For changing the Advanced Power Management (APM) conï¬guration Boot For changing the system boot conï¬guration Exit For selecting the exit options and loading default settings 4 . 2 . 1 B I O S m e n u s c r e e n To select an item on the menu bar, press the right or left arrow key on the keyboard until the desired item is highlighted. Some of the navigation keys differ from one screen to another. 4 . 2 . 3 N a v i g a t i o n k e y s At the bottom right corner of a menu screen are the navigation keys for that particular menu. Use the navigation keys to select items in the menu and change the settings. System Time [16:37:21] System Date [Wed,06/01/2005] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Primary IDE Master [ST320410A] Primary IDE Slave [ASUS CD-S520/A] Third IDE Master [Not Detected] Third IDE Slave [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Slave [Not Detected] IDE Conï¬guration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a ï¬eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conï¬gure the System time. N a v i g a t i o n k e y s G e n e r a l h e l p M e n u b a r S u b - m e n u i t e m s C o n f i g u r a t i o n f i e l d s M e n u i t e m s
4 - 1 2 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4 . 2 . 4 M e n u i t e m s The highlighted item on the menu bar displays the speciï¬c items for that menu. For example, selecting Main shows the Main menu items. The other items (Advanced, Power, Boot, and Exit) on the menu bar have their respective menu items. 4 . 2 . 5 S u b - m e n u i t e m s A solid triangle before each item on any menu screen means that the item has a sub-menu. To display the sub-menu, select the item and press <Enter>. 4 . 2 . 6 C o n f i g u r a t i o n f i e l d s These ï¬elds show the values for the menu items. If an item is user-conï¬gurable, you can change the value of the ï¬eld opposite the item. You cannot select an item that is not user-conï¬gurable. A conï¬gurable ï¬eld is enclosed in brackets, and is highlighted when selected. To change the value of a ï¬eld, select it then press <Enter> to display a list of options. Refer to â4.2.7 Pop-up window.â 4 . 2 . 7 P o p - u p w i n d o w Select a menu item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up window with the conï¬guration options for that item. 4 . 2 . 8 S c r o l l b a r A scroll bar appears on the right side of a menu screen when there are items that do not ï¬t on the screen. Press the Up/Down arrow keys or <Page Up> /<Page Down> keys to display the other items on the screen. 4 . 2 . 9 G e n e r a l h e l p At the top right corner of the menu screen is a brief description of the selected item. M a i n m e n u i t e m s Sy st em T im e [16:37:21] System Date [Wed, 06/01/2005] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Primary IDE Master :[ST320410A] Primary IDE Slave :[ ASUS CD-S520/A] Th ird I DE M as t er :[ No t Det ec te d] Th ird I DE S la v e :[ No t Det ec te d] Fo urt h ID E Ma s te r :[ No t D et ec ted ] Fo urt h ID E Sl a ve :[ No t D et ect ed ] ID E C on ï¬g ur at i on Sy ste m In fo rm a ti on S c r o l l b a r Advanced PCI/PnP Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. Plug And Play O/S [No] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Palette Snooping [Disabled] PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] P o p - u p w i n d o w
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 1 3 4.3 Main menu When you enter the BIOS Setup program, the Main menu screen appears, giving you an overview of the basic system information. 4 . 3 . 1 S y s t e m T i m e [ x x : x x : x x ] Sets the system time. 4 . 3 . 2 S y s t e m D a t e [ D a y x x / x x / x x x x ] Sets the system date. 4 . 3 . 3 L e g a c y D i s k e t t e A [ 1 . 4 4 M , 3 . 5 i n . ] Sets the type of ï¬oppy drive installed. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [360K, 5.25 in.] [1.2M , 5.25 in.] [720K , 3.5 in.] [1.44M, 3.5 in.] [2.88M, 3.5 in.] Refer to section â4.2.1 BIOS menu screenâ for information on the menu screen items and how to navigate through them. Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a ï¬eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conï¬gure the System time. System Time [16:37:21] System Date [Mon,10/02/2004] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Primary IDE Master : [ST320410A] Primary IDE Slave : [ASUS CD-S520/A] Third IDE Master : [Not Detected] Third IDE Slave : [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master : [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Slave : [Not Detected] IDE Conï¬guration System Information
4 - 1 4 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4 . 3 . 4 P r i m a r y , T h i r d , a n d F o u r t h I D E M a s t e r / S l a v e While entering Setup, the BIOS automatically detects the presence of IDE devices. There is a separate sub-menu for each IDE device. Select a device item then press <Enter> to display the IDE device information. Primary IDE Master Select the type of device connected to the system. Device : Hard Disk Vendor : ST320410A Size : 20.0GB LBA Mode : Supported Block Mode : 16 Sectors PIO Mode : 4 Async DMA : MultiWord DMA-2 Ultra DMA : Ultra DMA-5 SMART Monitoring : Supported Type [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Block(Multi-sector Transfer) M [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] 32Bit Data Transfer [Enabled] The BIOS automatically detects the values opposite the dimmed items (Device, Vendor, Size, LBA Mode, Block Mode, PIO Mode, Async DMA, Ultra DMA, and SMART monitoring). These values are not user-conï¬gurable. These items show N/A if no IDE device is installed in the system. T y p e [ A u t o ] Selects the type of IDE drive. Setting to Auto allows automatic selection of the appropriate IDE device type. Select CDROM if you are speciï¬cally conï¬guring a CD-ROM drive. Select ARMD (ATAPI Removable Media Device) if your device is either a ZIP, LS-120, or MO drive. Conï¬guration options: [Not Installed] [Auto] [CDROM] [ARMD] L B A / L a r g e M o d e [ A u t o ] Enables or disables the LBA mode. Setting to Auto enables the LBA mode if the device supports this mode, and if the device was not previously formatted with LBA mode disabled. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Auto] B l o c k ( M u l t i - s e c t o r T r a n s f e r ) [ A u t o ] Enables or disables data multi-sectors transfers. When set to Auto, the data transfer from and to the device occurs multiple sectors at a time if the device supports multi-sector transfer feature. When set to [Disabled], the data transfer from and to the device occurs one sector at a time. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Auto]
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 1 5 P I O M o d e [ A u t o ] Selects the PIO mode. Conï¬guration options: [Auto] [0] [1] [2] [3] [4] D M A M o d e [ A u t o ] Allows the BIOS to automatically select the DMA mode. Conï¬guration option: [Auto] [SWDMA0] [SWDMA1] [SWDMA2] [MWDMA0] [MWDMA1] [MWDMA2] [UDMA0] [UDMA1] [UDMA2] [UDMA3] [UDMA4] [UDMA5] S M A R T M o n i t o r i n g [ A u t o ] Sets the Smart Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology. Conï¬guration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] 3 2 B i t D a t a T r a n s f e r [ E n a b l e d ] Enables or disables 32-bit data transfer. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4 . 3 . 5 I D E C o n f i g u r a t i o n The items in this menu allow you to set or change the conï¬gurations for the IDE devices installed in the system. Select an item then press <Enter> if you want to conï¬gure the item. IDE Conï¬guration Conï¬gure SATA As [Standard IDE] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Enhanced Mode Support On [S-ATA] IDE Detect Time Out (Sec) [35] C o n f i g u r e S A T A A s [ S t a n d a r d I D E ] Sets the Serial ATA conï¬guration. When set in Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI) or RAID mode the SATA controller is set to Native mode. Conï¬guration options: [Standard IDE] [AHCI] [RAID] O n b o a r d I D E O p e r a t e M o d e [ E n h a n c e d M o d e ] Allows selection of the IDE operation mode depending on the operating system (OS) that you installed. Set to Enhanced Mode if you are using native OS, such as Windows ® 2000. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Compatible Mode] [Enhanced Mode] When in AHCI/RAID mode, SATA controller is forced to Native mode.
4 - 1 6 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p If the Onboard IDE Operate Mode is set to [Compatible], you can only use the SATA2, SATA4, and P-ATA connectors. Enhanced Mode Support On [S-ATA] The default setting SATA allows you to use native OS on Serial ATA and Parallel ATA ports. We recommend that you do not change the default setting for better OS compatibility. In this setting, you may use legacy OS on the Parallel ATA ports only if you did not install any Serial ATA device. The S-ATA P-ATA and P-ATA options are for advanced users only. If you set to any of these options and encounter problems, revert to the default setting SATA. Conï¬guration options: [S-ATA P-ATA] [S-ATA] [P-ATA] The Onboard IDE Operate Mode and its submenu items appear only when the Conï¬gure SATA As item is set to Standard IDE. Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM [Disabled] Enables or disables the onboard Serial ATA boot ROM. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM item appears only when the Conï¬gure SATA As item is set to RAID. ALPE and ASP [Disabled] Enables or disables the ALPE and ASP. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] S t a g g e r S p i n u p S u p p o r t [ D i s a b l e d ] Enables or disables the stagger spinup support. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] A H C I P o r t 3 I n t e r l o c k S w i t c h [ D i s a b l e d ] Enables or disables the Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI) Port 3 interlock switch. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The ALPE and ASP item appears only when the Conï¬gure SATA As item is set to AHCI. I D E D e t e c t T i m e O u t [ 3 5 ] Selects the time out value for detecting ATA/ATAPI devices. Conï¬guration options: [0] [5] [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [35]
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 1 7 4 . 3 . 6 S y s t e m I n f o r m a t i o n This menu gives you an overview of the general system speciï¬cations. The BIOS automatically detects the items in this menu. A M I B I O S Displays the auto-detected BIOS information. P r o c e s s o r Displays the auto-detected CPU speciï¬cation. S y s t e m M e m o r y Displays the auto-detected system memory. AMIBIOS Version : 08.00.11 Build Date : 12/12/05 Processor Type : Genuine Intel(R) CPU 3.20 GHz Speed : 3200 MHz Count : 1 System Memory Size : 512 MB
4 - 1 8 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4.4 Advanced menu The Advanced menu items allow you to change the settings for the CPU and other system devices. Take caution when changing the settings of the Advanced menu items. Incorrect ï¬eld values can cause the system to malfunction. USB Conï¬guration MPS Conï¬guration Remote Access Conï¬guration CPU Conï¬guration Chipset Onboard Devices Conï¬guration PCIPnP USB settings. The Module Version and USB Devices Enabled items show the auto-detected values. If no USB device is detected, the item shows None. 4 . 4 . 1 U S B C o n f i g u r a t i o n The items in this menu allow you to change the USB-related features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conï¬guration options. USB Conï¬guration Module Version - 2.24.0-F.4 USB Devices Enabled: None USB Function [8 USB Ports] Legacy USB Support [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] BIOS EHCI Hand-Off [Enabled] Enables USB host controllers.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 1 9 U S B F u n c t i o n [ 8 U S B P o r t s ] Allows you to disable or set the USB host controllers. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [2 USB Ports] [4 USB Ports] [6 USB Ports] [8 USB Ports] L e g a c y U S B S u p p o r t [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable support for USB devices on legacy operating systems (OS). Setting to Auto allows the system to detect the presence of USB devices at startup. If detected, the USB controller legacy mode is enabled. If no USB device is detected, the legacy USB support is disabled. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] U S B 2 . 0 C o n t r o l l e r [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the USB 2.0 controller. Conï¬guration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] U S B 2 . 0 C o n t r o l l e r M o d e [ H i S p e e d ] Allows you to set the USB 2.0 controller mode to HiSpeed (480 Mbps) or FullSpeed (12 Mbps). Conï¬guration options: [FullSpeed ] [HiSpeed ] B I O S E H C I H a n d - O f f [ E n a b l e d ] This is a workaround for operating systems without EHCI hand-off support. The ownership should be claimed by the EHCI driver. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4 . 4 . 2 M P S C o n f i g u r a t i o n This menu allows you to conï¬gure the Multi-Processor table. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conï¬guration options. MPS Conï¬guration MPS Revision [1.4] M P S R e v i s i o n [ 1 . 4 ] Allows you to choose the MPS revision. Conï¬guration options: [1.1] [1.4] Select MPS Revision.
4 - 2 0 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4 . 4 . 3 R e m o t e A c c e s s C o n f i g u r a t i o n The items in this menu allow you to conï¬gure the Remote Access features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conï¬guration options. Conï¬gure Remote Access type and parameters Remote Access [Disabled] Select Remote Access type. R e m o t e A c c e s s [ D i s a b l e d ] Enables or disables the remote access feature. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The succeeding items appear only when the item Remote Access is set to [Enabled]. S e r i a l p o r t n u m b e r [ C O M 1 ] Sets the serial port for console redirection. Make sure the selected port is enabled. Conï¬guration options: [COM1] [COM2] B a s e A d d r e s s , I R Q [ 3 F 8 h , 4 ] Sets the base address and IRQ assignment of the selected serial port . This item is auto-detected and is not user-conï¬gurable. S e r i a l P o r t M o d e [ 1 1 5 2 0 0 , 8 , n , 1 ] Allows you to select the serial port mode settings. Conï¬guration options: [115200 8,n,1] [57600 8,n,1] [38400 8,n,1] [19200 8,n,1] [09600 8,n,1] F l o w C o n t r o l [ N o n e ] Allows you to select the ï¬ow control for console redirection. Conï¬guration options: [None] [Hardware] [Software] R e d i r e c t i o n a f t e r B I O S P O S T [ A l w a y s ] Sets the redirection mode after the BIOS Power-On Self-Test (POST). Some operating systems may not work when you set the item to [Always]. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Boot Loader] [Always] T e r m i n a l T y p e [ A N S I ] Allows you to select the target terminal type. Conï¬guration options: [ANSI] [VT100] [VT-UTF8]
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 2 1 4 . 4 . 4 C P U C o n f i g u r a t i o n The items in this menu show the CPU-related information that the BIOS automatically detects. Conï¬gure advanced CPU Settings Manufacturer : Intel Brand String : Genuine Intel (R) CPU 3.20GHz Frequency : 3200 MHz FSB Speed : 800 MHz Cache L1 : 16 KB Cache L2 : 1024 KB Cache L3 : 0 KB Ratio Status: Unlocked (Max:16, Min:14) Ratio Actual Value : 14 Max CPUID Value Limit: [Disabled] Execute Disable Function [Disabled] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] Hardware Prefetcher: [Enabled] Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch: [Enabled] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] Sets the ratio between CPU Core Clock and the FSB Frequency. NOTE: If an invalid ratio is set in CMOS then actual and setpoint values may differ. M a x C P U I D V a l u e L i m i t [ D i s a b l e d ] Enable this item to boot legacy operating systems that cannot support CPUs with extended CPUID functions. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] E x e c u t e D i s a b l e F u n c t i o n [ D i s a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the execute disable function. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] E n h a n c e d C 1 C o n t r o l [ A u t o ] When set to [Auto], the BIOS will automatically check the CPUʼs capability to enable the C1E support. In C1E mode, the CPU power consumption is lower when idle. Conï¬guration options: [Auto] [Disabled] H a r d w a r e P r e f e t c h e r [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the hardware prefetcher feature. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] A d j a c e n t C a c h e L i n e P r e f e t c h [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the adjacent cache line prefetch feature. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] V T - U T F 8 C o m b o K e y S u p p o r t [ E n a b l e d ] Enables or disables the VT-UTF8 combo key support for ANSI or VT100 terminals. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4 - 2 2 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p C P U I n t e r n a l T h e r m a l C o n t r o l [ A u t o ] Disables or sets the CPU internal thermal control. Conï¬guration options: [Auto] [Disabled] The following item appears only when you installed an Intel ® Pentium ® 4 processor that supports Hyper Threading Technology . H y p e r T h r e a d i n g T e c h n o l o g y [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the processor Hyper Threading Technology. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The following item appears only when you installed an Intel ® Pentium ® 4 processor that supports Intel ® Speedstep technology. I n t e l ( R ) S p e e d S t e p T e c h n o l o g y [ A u t o m a t i c ] Allows you to use the Enhanced Intel SpeedStep ® Technology. When set to [Automatic], you can adjust the system power settings in the operating system to use the EIST feature. Se t t hi s i te m t o [Di sab le d] if you do not want to use the EIST. Conï¬guration options: [Automatic] [Disabled] ⢠Refer to the Appendix for details on how to use the EIST feature. ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS ï¬le that supports EIST.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 2 3 4 . 4 . 5 C h i p s e t The Chipset menu allows you to change the advanced chipset settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Manual DRAM Frequency Setting or Auto by SPD. Advanced Chipset Settings DRAM Frequency [Auto] Conï¬gure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Onboard LAN Boot ROM [Enabled] PEG Port Conï¬guration PEG Port [Enabled] PEG Port VC1 Map [TC7] PEG Force x1 [Disabled] Memory Remap Feature [Enabled] D R A M F r e q u e n c y [ A u t o ] Allows you to manually set the DRAM frequency. Setting to [Auto] allows the BIOS to automatically set the DRAM frequency by Serial Presence Detect (SPD). Conï¬guration options: [Auto] [533 MHz] [667 MHz] C o n f i g u r e D R A M T i m i n g b y S P D [ E n a b l e d ] When this item is enabled, the DRAM timing parameters are set according to the DRAM SPD (Serial Presence Detect). When disabled, you can manually set the DRAM timing parameters through the DRAM sub-items. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The following sub-items appear when this item is Disabled. DRAM CAS# Latency [5 Clocks] Controls the latency between the SDRAM read command and the time the data actually becomes available. Conï¬guration options: [5 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [6 Clocks] DRAM RAS# Precharge [4 Clocks] Controls the idle clocks after issuing a precharge command to the DDR SDRAM. Conï¬guration options: [2 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [5 Clocks] DRAM RAS# to CAS# Delay [4 Clocks] Controls the latency between the DDR SDRAM active command and the read/write command. Conï¬guration options: [2 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [5 Clocks] DRAM RAS# Activate to Precharge Delay [15 Clocks] Conï¬guration options: [1 Clock] ~ [15 Clocks]
4 - 2 4 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p DRAM Write Recovery Time [4 Clocks] Sets the DRAM write recovery time. Conï¬guration options: [2 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [5 Clocks] O n b o a r d L A N B o o t R O M [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard LAN boot ROM. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] P E G P o r t [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the PCI Express Graphics port. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] P E G P o r t V C 1 M a p [ T C 7 ] Allows you to disable or set the PCI Express Graphics port VC1 map. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [TC1] ~ [TC7] P E G F o r c e x 1 [ D i s a b l e d ] Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] M e m o r y R e m a p F e a t u r e [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the memory remap feature. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] If you set the Memory Remap Feature item disabled, system may only show less than 4 GB memory due to chipset resource allocation when you installed four 1GB memory modules.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 2 5 4 . 4 . 6 O n b o a r d D e v i c e s C o n f i g u r a t i o n Conï¬gure Win627EHF Super IO Chipset Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port2 Address [2F8/IRQ3] Serial Port2 Mode [Normal] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] Parallel Port IRQ [IRQ7] S e r i a l P o r t 1 A d d r e s s [ 3 F 8 / I R Q 4 ] Allows you to select the Serial Port1 base address. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [3F8/IRQ4] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] S e r i a l P o r t 2 A d d r e s s [ 2 F 8 / I R Q 3 ] Allows you to select the Serial Port1 base address. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [2F8/IRQ3] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] S e r i a l P o r t 2 M o d e [ N o r m a l ] Allows the BIOS to select the Serial Port 2 mode. Conï¬guration options: [Normal] [IrDA] [ASK IR] P a r a l l e l P o r t A d d r e s s [ 3 7 8 ] Allows you to select the Parallel Port base addresses. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [378] [278] [3BC] P a r a l l e l P o r t M o d e [ E C P ] Allows you to select the Parallel Port mode. Conï¬guration options: [Normal] [Bi-directional] [EPP] [ECP] E C P M o d e D M A C h a n n e l [ D M A 3 ] Appears only when the Parallel Port Mode is set to [ECP]. This item allows you to set the Parallel Port ECP DMA. Conï¬guration options: [DMA0] [DMA1] [DMA3] E P P V e r s i o n [ 1 . 9 ] Allows selection of the Parallel Port EPP version. This item appears only when the Parallel Port Mode is set to EPP. Conï¬guration options: [1.9] [1.7] P a r a l l e l P o r t I R Q [ I R Q 7 ] Allows selection of the Parallel Port IRQ. Conï¬guration options: [IRQ5] [IRQ7] Enable or disable the Azalia controller.
4 - 2 6 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4 . 4 . 7 P C I P n P The PCI PnP menu items allow you to change the advanced settings for PCI/PnP devices. The menu includes setting IRQ and DMA channel resources for either PCI/PnP or legacy ISA devices, and setting the memory size block for legacy ISA devices. Take caution when changing the settings of the PCI PnP menu items. Incorrect ï¬eld values can cause the system to malfunction. Advanced PCI/PnP Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. Plug And Play O/S [No] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Palette Snooping [Disabled] IRQ-3 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-4 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-5 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-7 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-9 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-10 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-11 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-14 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-15 assigned to [PCI Device] P l u g a n d P l a y O / S [ N o ] When set to [No], BIOS conï¬gures all the devices in the system. When set to [Yes] and if you install a Plug and Play operating system, the operating system conï¬gures the Plug and Play devices not required for boot. Conï¬guration options: [No] [Yes] P C I L a t e n c y T i m e r [ 6 4 ] Allows you to select the value in units of PCI clocks for the PCI device latency timer register. Conï¬guration options: [32] [64] [96] [128] [160] [192] [224] [248] A l l o c a t e I R Q t o P C I V G A [ Y e s ] When set to [Yes], BIOS assigns an IRQ to PCI VGA card if the card requests for an IRQ. When set to [No], BIOS does not assign an IRQ to the PCI VGA card even if requested. Conï¬guration options: [Yes] [No] P a l e t t e S n o o p i n g [ D i s a b l e d ] When set to [Enabled], the palette snooping feature informs the PCI devices that an ISA graphics device is installed in the system so that the latter can function correctly. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] No: Lets the BIOS conï¬gure all the devices in the system. Yes: Lets the operating system conï¬gure Plug and Play (PnP) devices not required for boot if your system has a Plug and Play operating system.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 2 7 4.5 Power menu The Power menu items allow you to change the settings for the ACPI and Advanced Power Management (APM). Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conï¬guration options. 4 . 5 . 1 A C P I A P I C S u p p o r t [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the Advanced Conï¬guration and Power Interface (ACPI) support in the Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC). When set to Enabled, the ACPI APIC table pointer is included in the RSDT pointer list. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] APM Conï¬guration Hardware Monitor Select the ACPI state used for System Suspend. I R Q - x x a s s i g n e d t o [ P C I D e v i c e ] When set to [PCI Device], the speciï¬c IRQ is free for use of PCI/PnP devices. When set to [Reserved], the IRQ is reserved for legacy ISA devices. Conï¬guration options: [PCI Device] [Reserved]
4 - 2 8 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4 . 5 . 2 A P M C o n f i g u r a t i o n APM Conï¬guration Restore on AC Power Loss [Last State] Resume On RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Resume On Ring [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Keyboard Wakeup Password : Not Installed R e s t o r e o n A C P o w e r L o s s [ L a s t S t a t e ] When set to Power Off, the system goes into off state after an AC power loss. When set to Power On, the system goes on after an AC power loss. When set to Last State, the system goes into either off or on state, whatever the system state was before the AC power loss. Conï¬guration options: [Power Off] [Power On] [Last State] R e s u m e O n R T C A l a r m [ D i s a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable RTC to generate a wake event. When this item is set to Enabled, the items RTC Alarm Date, RTC Alarm Hour, RTC Alarm Minute, and RTC Alarm Second appear with set values. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] P o w e r O n B y P S / 2 K e y b o a r d [ D i s a b l e d ] Allows you to use speciï¬c keys on the keyboard to turn on the system. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] P o w e r O n B y P S / 2 M o u s e [ D i s a b l e d ] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to use the PS/2 mouse to turn on the system. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] R e s u m e O n R i n g [ D i s a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the RI to generate a wake event. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Options Power Off Power On Last State
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 2 9 P o w e r O n B y P C I D e v i c e s [ D i s a b l e d ] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to turn on the system through a PCI LAN or modem card. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] K e y b o a r d W a k e u p P a s s w o r d This item appears only when the Power On By PS/2 Keyboard is set to Enabled. Select this item to set or change the keyboard wakeup password. The Keyboard Wakeup Password item that appears below shows the default Not Installed. After you have set a password, this item shows Installed. 4 . 5 . 3 H a r d w a r e M o n i t o r Hardware Monitor CPU Temperature [51ºC/122.5ºF] MB Temperature [41ºC/105.5ºF] CPU Fan1 Speed [3813 RPM] CPU Fan2 Speed [N/A] Front Fan1 Speed [N/A] Front Fan2 Speed [N/A] Rear Fan1 Speed [N/A] Rear Fan2 Speed [N/A] Smart Fan Control [Enabled] VCORE Voltage [ 1.320V] 3.3V Voltage [ 3.345V] 5V Voltage [ 5.094V] 5VSB Voltage [ 4.824V] VBAT Voltage [ 3.040V] 12V Voltage [11.880V] CPU1 Temperature C P U T e m p e r a t u r e [ x x x º C / x x x º F ] M B T e m p e r a t u r e [ x x x º C / x x x º F ] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the motherboard, CPU, and ambient temperatures. Select [Ignored] if you do not wish to display the detected temperatures.
4 - 3 0 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p C P U F a n 1 / 2 S p e e d [ x x x x R P M ] o r [ N / A ] F r o n t F a n 1 / 2 S p e e d [ x x x x R P M ] o r [ N / A ] R e a r F a n 1 / 2 S p e e d [ x x x x R P M ] o r [ N / A ] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the CPU fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the motherboard, the ï¬eld shows N/A. S m a r t F a n C o n t r o l [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Smart Fan feature that smartly adjusts the fan speeds for more efï¬cient system operation. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] When Smart Fan Control item is set to [Enabled], the CPU Target Temperature and MB Target Temperature items appear. C P U T a r e g e t T e m p e r a t u r e [ x x x ] M B T a r e g e t T e m p e r a t u r e [ x x x ] Allows you to set the temperature threshold when the CPU fan speed is increased. If the CPU/MB temperature is above your setting, the CPU fan runs at its maximum speed. If the CPU/MB temperature is below your setting, the CPU fan runs at a lower speed. To set, use the <-> or < > key. V C O R E V o l t a g e , 3 . 3 V V o l t a g e , 5 V V o l t a g e , 5 V S B V o l t a g e , V B A T V o l t a g e , 1 2 V V o l t a g e The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects the voltage output through the onboard voltage regulators.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 3 1 Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub-screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 4.6 Boot menu The Boot menu items allow you to change the system boot options. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Boot Settings Boot Device Priority Boot Settings Conï¬guration Security 4 . 6 . 1 B o o t D e v i c e P r i o r i t y 1 s t ~ x x t h B o o t D e v i c e [ 1 s t F l o p p y D r i v e ] These items specify the boot device priority sequence from the available devices. The number of device items that appears on the screen depends on the number of devices installed in the system. Conï¬guration options: [xxxxx Drive] [Disabled] Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device [1st FLOPPY DRIVE] 2nd Boot Device [Hard Drive] 3rd Boot Device [ATAPI CD-ROM] 4th Boot Device [Network: MBA v8.1.5] Speciï¬es the Boot Device Boot Priority sequence. Speciï¬es the boot sequence from the availabe devices.
4 - 3 2 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4 . 6 . 2 B o o t S e t t i n g s C o n f i g u r a t i o n Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Boot Settings Conï¬guration Quick Boot [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] AddOn ROM Display Mode [ForceBIOS] Bootup Num-Lock [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Wait For âF1â If Error [Enabled] Hit âDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Enabled] Allows BIOS to skip certain tests while booting. This will decrease the time needed to boot the system. Q u i c k B o o t [ E n a b l e d ] Enabling this item allows the BIOS to skip some power on self tests (POST) while booting to decrease the time needed to boot the system. When set to [Disabled], BIOS performs all the POST items. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] F u l l S c r e e n L o g o [ E n a b l e d ] This allows you to enable or disable the full screen logo display feature. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Set this item to [Enabled] to use the ASUS MyLogo2⢠feature. A d d O n R O M D i s p l a y M o d e [ F o r c e B I O S ] Sets the display mode for the option ROM. Conï¬guration options: [ForceBIOS] [Keep Current] B o o t u p N u m - L o c k [ O n ] Allows you to select the power-on state for the NumLock. Conï¬guration options: [Off] [On] P S / 2 M o u s e S u p p o r t [ A u t o ] Allows you to enable or disable support for PS/2 mouse. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] W a i t f o r Ê» F 1 ʼ I f E r r o r [ E n a b l e d ] When set to Enabled, the system waits for the F1 key to be pressed when error occurs. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 3 3 H i t Ê» D E L ʼ M e s s a g e D i s p l a y [ E n a b l e d ] When set to Enabled, the system displays the message âPress DEL to run Setupâ during POST. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] I n t e r r u p t 1 9 C a p t u r e [ E n a b l e d ] When set to [Enabled], this function allows the option ROMs to trap Interrupt 19. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4 . 6 . 3 S e c u r i t y The Security menu items allow you to change the system security settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conï¬guration options. Security Settings Supervisor Password : Not Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password Change User Password <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disabled password. C h a n g e S u p e r v i s o r P a s s w o r d Select this item to set or change the supervisor password. The Supervisor Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. To set a Supervisor Password: 1. Select the Change Supervisor Password item and press <Enter>. 2. From the password box, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Conï¬rm the password when prompted. The message âPassword Installedâ appears after you successfully set your password. To change the supervisor password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. To clear the supervisor password, select the Change Supervisor Password then press <Enter>. The message âPassword Uninstalledâ appears.
4 - 3 4 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p After you have set a supervisor password, the other items appear to allow you to change other security settings. U s e r A c c e s s L e v e l ( F u l l A c c e s s ] This item allows you to select the access restriction to the Setup items. Conï¬guration options: [No Access] [View Only] [Limited] [Full Access] No Access prevents user access to the Setup utility. View Only allows access but does not allow change to any ï¬eld. Limited allows changes only to selected ï¬elds, such as Date and Time. Full Access allows viewing and changing all the ï¬elds in the Setup utility. C h a n g e U s e r P a s s w o r d Select this item to set or change the user password. The User Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. To set a User Password: 1. Select the Change User Password item and press <Enter>. 2. On the password box that appears, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Conï¬rm the password when prompted. If you forget your BIOS password, you can clear it by erasing the CMOS Real Time Clock (RTC) RAM. See section â2.6 Jumpersâ for information on how to erase the RTC RAM. Security Settings Supervisor Password : Installed User Password : Installed Change Supervisor Password User Access Level [Full Access] Change User Password Clear User Password Password Check [Setup] <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disabled password.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 3 5 The message âPassword Installedâ appears after you set your password successfully. To change the user password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. C l e a r U s e r P a s s w o r d Select this item to clear the user password. P a s s w o r d C h e c k [ S e t u p ] When set to [Setup], BIOS checks for user password when accessing the Setup utility. When set to [Always], BIOS checks for user password both when accessing Setup and booting the system. Conï¬guration options: [Setup] [Always] 4.7 Exit menu Pressing <Esc> does not immediately exit this menu. Select one of the options from this menu or <F10> from the legend bar to exit. The Exit menu items allow you to load the optimal or failsafe default values for the BIOS items, and save or discard your changes to the BIOS items. Exit Options Exit & Save Changes Exit & Discard Changes Discard Changes Load Setup Defaults Exit system setup after saving the changes. F10 key can be used for this operation.
4 - 3 6 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p E x i t & D i s c a r d C h a n g e s Select this option only if you do not want to save the changes that you made to the Setup program. If you made changes to ï¬elds other than System Date, System Time, and Password, the BIOS asks for a conï¬rmation before exiting. D i s c a r d C h a n g e s This option allows you to discard the selections you made and restore the previously saved values. After selecting this option, a conï¬rmation appears. Select OK to discard any changes and load the previously saved values. L o a d S e t u p D e f a u l t s This option allows you to load the default values for each of the parameters on the Setup menus. When you select this option or if you press <F5>, a conï¬rmation window appears. Select OK to load default values. Select Exit & Save Changes or make other changes before saving the values to the non-volatile RAM. If you attempt to exit the Setup program without saving your changes, the program prompts you with a message asking if you want to save your changes before exiting. Press <Enter> to save the changes while exiting. E x i t & S a v e C h a n g e s Once you are ï¬nished making your selections, choose this option from the Exit menu to ensure the values you selected are saved to the CMOS RAM. An onboard backup battery sustains the CMOS RAM so it stays on even when the PC is turned off. When you select this option, a conï¬rmation window appears. Select OK to save changes and exit.
5 RAID support This chapter provides information on RAID conï¬gurations for this motherboard.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C Chapter summary 5 5.1 RAID conï¬gurations .............................................................. 5-1 5.2 Intel Matrix Storage Manager option ROM utility .................. 5-3 5.3 LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility .................... 5-12 5.4 Global Array Manager .......................................................... 5-34
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 1 5.1 RAID conï¬gurations The server system/motherboard comes with the Intel ® ICH7R and the LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID technology built-in the Intel ® ICH7R SouthBridge chipset that allows you to conï¬gure IDE and Serial ATA hard disk drives as RAID sets. The motherboard supports the following RAID conï¬gurations: 5 . 1 . 1 R A I D d e f i n i t i o n s RAID 0 (Data striping) optimizes two identical hard disk drives to read and write data in parallel, interleaved stacks. Two hard disks perform the same work as a single drive but at a sustained data transfer rate, double that of a single disk alone, thus improving data access and storage. Use of two new identical hard disk drives is required for this setup. RAID 1 (Data mirroring) copies and maintains an identical image of data from one drive to a second drive. If one drive fails, the disk array management software directs all applications to the surviving drive as it contains a complete copy of the data in the other drive. This RAID conï¬guration provides data protection and increases fault tolerance to the entire system. Use two new drives or use an existing drive and a new drive for this setup. The new drive must be of the same size or larger than the existing drive. RAID 5 stripes both data and parity information across three or more hard disk drives. Among the advantages of RAID 5 conï¬guration include better HDD performance, fault tolerance, and higher storage capacity. The RAID 5 conï¬guration is best suited for transaction processing, relational database applications, enterprise resource planning, and other business systems. Use a minimum of three identical hard disk drives for this setup. RAID 10 is a striped conï¬guration with RAID 1 segments whose segments are RAID 1 arrays. This conï¬guration has the same fault tolerance as RAID 1, and has the same overhead for fault-tolerance as mirroring alone. RAID 10 achieves high input/output rates by striping RAID 1 segments. In some instances, a RAID 10 conï¬guration can sustain multiple simultaneous drive failure. A minimum of four hard disk drives is required for this setup. Intel ® Matrix Storage. The Intel ® Matrix Storage technology supported by the ICH7R chip allows you to create a RAID 0 and a RAID 1 set using only two identical hard disk drives. The Intel ® Matrix Storage technology creates two partitions on each hard disk drive to create a virtual RAID 0 and RAID 1 sets. This technology also allows you to change the hard disk drive partition size without losing any data. If you want to boot the system from a hard disk drive included in a created RAID set, copy ï¬rst the RAID driver from the support CD to a ï¬oppy disk before you install an operating system to the selected hard disk drive. Refer to section â6.1 RAID driver installationâ for details.
5 - 2 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 5 . 1 . 2 I n s t a l l i n g S e r i a l A T A h a r d d i s k s The motherboard supports Serial ATA hard disk drives. For optimal performance, install identical drives of the same model and capacity when creating a disk array. To install the SATA hard disks for a RAID conï¬guration: 1. Install the SATA hard disks into the drive bays. 2. Connect the SATA signal cables. 3. Connect a SATA power cable to the power connector on each drive. 5 . 1 . 3 S e t t i n g t h e R A I D i t e m i n B I O S You must set the RAID item in the BIOS Setup before you can create a RAID set(s). To do this: 1. Enter the BIOS Setup during POST. 2. Go to th e Mai n Men u, se le ct ID E C on ï¬gu ra tio n, th en pr ess < Ent er >. 3. Select the item Co nï¬g ure S ATA A s, then press <Enter> to display the conï¬guration options. 4. Select RA ID from the Conï¬gure SATA As item options, then press <Enter>. 5. Select the item On boa rd Se ria l- ATA B OOT RO M, press <Enter>, then select En abl ed from the options. 6. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup. Refer to Chapter 4 for details on entering and navigating through the BIOS Setup. 5 . 1 . 4 R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n u t i l i t y Depending on the RAID_SEL1 jumper setting and the operating system, you can select a utility to create a RAID set. Refer to section â2.6 Jumpersâ for details on the RAID_SEL1 jumper settings. Use the Intel ® Matrix Storag e Manage r to create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1, or software RAID 5 under Windows ® 2000/2003 Server/XP operating system. Use t he LSI L ogi c Embed ded SATA RAI D Setup U til ity t o crea te a RAID 0 , R A I D 1 , o r R A ID 0 1 u n d e r W i n d o w s ® 2 0 0 0 / 2 0 0 3 S e r v e r /X P o r Red Hat ® Enterprise ver. 3.0 operating system. R ef e r to t he s uc c e e di n g se c t i on s f or d et a i l s on ho w to u s e t h e R A I D conï¬guration utilities.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 3 5.2 Intel ® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility The Intel ® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM utility allows you to create RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10 (RAID 0 1), and RAID 5 set(s) from Serial ATA hard disk drives that are connected to the Serial ATA connectors supported by the Southbridge. To enter the Intel ® Application Accelerator RAID Option ROM utility: 1. Install all the Serial ATA hard disk drives. 2. Turn on the system. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ MAIN MENU ] 1. Create RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 4. Exit [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] RAID Volumes: None deï¬ned. Physical Disks: Port Drive Model Serial # Size Type/Status(Vol ID) 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk [ ââ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu The navigation keys at the bottom of the screen allow you to move through the menus and select the menu options. The RAID BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference only and may not exactly match the items on your screen.
5 - 4 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 5 . 2 . 1 C r e a t i n g a R A I D 0 s e t ( s t r i p e d ) To create a RAID 0 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID Volume, then press <Enter>. This screen appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 0 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 0(Stripe), then press <Enter>. 4. When the Disks item is highlighted, press <Enter> to select the hard disk drives to conï¬gure as RAID. This pop-up screen appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. [ ââ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume0 RAID0(Stripe) Select Disks 128KB 0.0 GB Create Volume [ SELECT DISKS ] [ ââ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk Select 2 to 4 disks to use in creating the volume. 5. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight a drive, then press <Space> to select. A small triangle marks the selected drive. Press <Enter> after completing your selection.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 5 6. Use the up/down arrow key to select the stripe size for the RAID 0 array, then press <Enter>. The available stripe size values range from 4 KB to 128 KB. The default stripe size is 128 KB. WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 9. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to the main menu, or <N> to go back to the Create Volume menu. TIP: We recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing. 7. Key in the RAID volume capacity that you want, then press <Enter>. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity. 8. Press <Enter> when the Create Volume item is highlighted. This warning message appears.
5 - 6 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 5 . 2 . 2 C r e a t i n g a R A I D 1 s e t ( m i r r o r e d ) To create a RAID 1 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID Volume, then press <Enter>. This screen appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 1 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 1(Mirror), then press <Enter>. 4. When the Capacity item is highlighted, key in the RAID volume capacity that you want, then press <Enter>. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity. 5. Press <Enter> when the Create Volume item is highlighted. This warning message appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. [ ââ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume1 RAID1(Mirror) Select Disks N/A XX.X GB Create Volume WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 6. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to main menu or <N> to go back to Create Volume menu.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 7 5 . 2 . 3 C r e a t i n g a R A I D 1 0 s e t ( R A I D 0 1 ) To create a RAID 10 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID Volume, then press <Enter>. This screen appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 10 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 10(RAID0 1), then press <Enter>. 4. When the Stripe Size item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select the stripe size for the RAID 10 array, then press <Enter>. The available stripe size values range from 4 KB to 128 KB. The default stripe size is 64 KB. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume10 RAID10(RAID0 1) Select Disks 128KB XXX.X GB Create Volume [ ââ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select TIP: We recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing. 5. Key in the RAID volume capacity that you want then press <Enter> when the Capacity item is highlighted. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity.
5 - 8 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 5 . 2 . 4 C r e a t i n g a R A I D 5 s e t ( p a r i t y ) To create a RAID 5 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID Volume, then press <Enter>. This screen appears. WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 7. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to the main menu or <N> to go back to the Create Volume menu. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume5 RAID5(Parity) Select Disks 64KB 0.0 GB Create Volume [ ââ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select 6. Press <Enter> when the Create Volume item is highlighted. This warning message appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 5 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 5(Parity), then press <Enter>.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 9 4. The Disks item is highlighted, press <Enter> to select the hard disk drives to conï¬gure as RAID. The following pop-up screen appears. [ SELECT DISKS ] [ ââ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk Select 2 to 4 disks to use in creating the volume. 5. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight the drive you want to set, then press <Space> to select. A small triangle marks the selected drive. Press <Enter> after completing your selection. 6. When the Stripe Size item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select the stripe size for the RAID 5 array, then press <Enter>. The available stripe size values range from 4 KB to 128 KB. The default stripe size is 64 KB. WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 9. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to the main menu or <N> to go back to the Create Volume menu. TIP: We recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing. 7. Key in the RAID volume capacity that you want, then press <Enter> when the Capacity item is highlighted. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity. 8. Press <Enter> when the Create Volume item is highlighted. This warning message appears.
5 - 1 0 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 5 . 2 . 5 D e l e t i n g a R A I D s e t 2. Use the up/down arrow key to select the RAID set you want to delete, then press <Del>. This window appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ DELETE VOLUME MENU ] Name Level Drives Capacity Status Bootable Volume0 RAIDX(xxxxx) X XXX.XGB Normal Yes [ HELP ] Deleting a volume will destroy the volume data on the drive(s) and cause any member disks to become available as non-RAID disks. WARNING: EXISTING DATA WITHIN THIS VOLUME WILL BE LOST AND NON-RECOVERABLE. [ ââ]-Select [<ESC>]-Previous Menu [<Del>]-Delete Volume 3. Press <Y> to delete the RAID set and return to the utility main menu; otherwise, press <N> to return to the Delete Volume menu. ALL DATA IN THE VOLUME WILL BE LOST! Are you sure you want to delete volume âVolumeXâ? (Y/N): [ DELETE VOLUME VERIFICATION ] Take caution when deleting a RAID set. You will lose all data on the hard disk drives when you delete a RAID set. To delete a RAID set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 2. Delete RAID Volume, then press <Enter> to display this screen.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 1 1 5 . 2 . 7 E x i t i n g t h e I n t e l ® M a t r i x S t o r a g e M a n a g e r u t i l i t y To exit the utility: 1. From the utility main menu, select 4. Exit, then press <Enter>. This window appears. Are you sure you want to exit? (Y/N): [ CONFIRM EXIT ] 2. Press <Y> to exit or press <N> to return to the utility main menu. 5 . 2 . 6 R e s e t t i n g D i s k s t o N o n - R A I D 2. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight the RAID set drive you want to reset, then press <Space> to select. 3. Press <Enter> to reset the RAID set drive. A conï¬ rmation message appears. 4. Press <Y> to reset the drive or press <N> to return to the utility main menu. 5. Follow steps 2 to 4 to select and reset other RAID set drives. [ RESET RAID DATA ] Resetting RAID data will remove internal RAID structures from the selected RAID disks. By removing these structures, the drive will revert back to a non-RAID disk. WARNING: Resetting a disk causes all data on the disk to be lost. Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Member Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Member Disk Select the disks that should be reset. [ ââ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete Take ca utio n be for e yo u re set a R AID volu me HDD to n on- RAID . Re sett ing a RA ID volu me H DD dele tes all int erna l RA ID stru ctur e o n th e dr ive. To reset a RAID set hard disk drive: 1. From the utility main menu, select 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID, then press <Enter> to display this screen.
5 - 1 2 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 5.3 LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility The LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility allows you to create RAID 0, RAID 1, and RAID 10 set(s) from SATA hard disk drives connected to the SATA connectors supported by the motherboard Southbridge chip. You may also create a RAID set(s) in a Windows ® operating environment using the Global Array Manager (GAM) application. Refer to the GAM user guide in the motherboard support CD for details. To enter the LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility: 1. Turn on the system after installing all the SATA hard disk drives. 2. During POST, the LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility automatically detects the installed SATA hard disk drives and displays any existing RAID set(s). Press <Ctrl> <M> to enter the utility. The LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID automatically conï¬gures a RAID 1 (Mirrored) set when the SATA is conï¬gured as RAID in the BIOS and you installed two hard disk drives without a RAID conï¬guration.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 1 3 5 . 3 . 1 C r e a t i n g a R A I D s e t The LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility allows you to create a RAID 0 or RAID 1 set using two types of conï¬gurations: Easy and New. In Easy Conï¬guration, the logical drive parameters are set automatically including the size and stripe size (RAID 1 only). In New Conï¬guration, you manually set the logical drive parameters and assign the set size and stripe size (RAID 1 only). 3. The utility main window appears. Use the arrow keys to select an option from the Management Menu, then press <Enter>. Refer to the Management Menu descriptions below. At the bottom of the screen is the legend box. The keys on the legend box allow you to navigate through the setup menu options or execute commands. The keys on the legend box vary according to the menu level. M e n u D e s c r i p t i o n Conï¬gure Allows you to create RAID 0, RAID 1, or RAID 10 set using the Easy Conï¬guration or the New Conï¬guration command. This menu also allows you to view, add, or clear RAID conï¬gurations or select the boot drive Initialize Allows you to initialize the logical drives of a created RAID set Objects Allows you to initialize logical drives or change the logical drive parameters Rebuild Allows you to rebuild failed drives Check Consistency Allows you to check the data consistency of the logical drives of a created RAID set
5 - 1 4 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n U s i n g E a s y C o n f i g u r a t i o n To create a RAID set using the Easy Conï¬guration option: 1. From the utility main menu, highlight Conï¬gure, then press <Enter>. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Easy Conï¬guration , then press <Enter>. 3. The ARRAY SELECTION MENU displays the available drives connected to the SATA ports. Select the drives you want to include in the RAID set, then press <SpaceBar>. When selected, the drive indicator changes from READY to ONLIN A[X]-[Y], where X is the array number, and Y is the drive number. The information of the selected hard disk drive displays at the bottom of the screen.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 1 5 4. Select all the drives required for the RAID set, then press <Enter>. The conï¬gurable array appears on screen. 5. Press <F10>, select the conï¬gurable array, then press <SpaceBar>. The logical drive information appears including a Logical Drive menu that allows you to change the logical drive parameters.
5 - 1 6 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 6. Select RAID from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 7. Select the RAID level from the menu, then press <Enter>. Yo u need at l ea st two id en ti ca l ha rd di sk dri ves w he n crea tin g a RA ID 1 se t. 8. When creating a RAID 1 or a RAID 10 set, select Stripe Size from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. When creating a RAID 0 set, proceed to step 10. 9. Key in the stripe size, then press <Enter>. For ser ver syst ems , we rec omme nd that you us e a lowe r a rray blo ck s ize . For mul time dia com pute r sy stem s u sed main ly for audi o a nd v ideo edi tin g, we r eco mmen d a high er arra y bl ock siz e fo r o ptim um p erfo rma nce.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 1 7 10. When ï¬nished setting the selected logical drive conï¬guration, select Accept from the menu, then press <Enter>. 11. Follow steps 5 to 10 to conï¬gure additional logical drives. 12. When prompted, save the conï¬guration, then press <Esc> to return to the Management Menu.
5 - 1 8 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n When a RAID set is alr eady exi sti ng, usin g t he Ne w Co nï¬g urat ion comm and era ses the exi stin g RA ID conï¬ gura tio n da ta. If y ou do n ot w ant to d ele te t he e xis ting RAI D se t, use the View /Add Co nï¬gu rati on c omm and to v iew or crea te anot her RAID co nï¬gu rati on. To create a RAID set using the New Conï¬guration option: 1. From the utility main menu, highlight Conï¬gure, then press <Enter>. 2. Use the arrow keys to select New Conï¬guration , then press <Enter>. 3. Follow steps 3 to 7 of the previous section. 4. Select Size from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 5. Key in the desired logical drive size, then press <Enter>. 6. Follow steps 8 to 12 of the previous section to create the RAID set. U s i n g N e w C o n f i g u r a t i o n
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 1 9 5 . 3 . 2 A d d i n g o r v i e w i n g a R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n You can add a new RAID conï¬guration or view an existing conï¬guration using the View/Add Conï¬guration command. A d d i n g a n e w R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n To add a new RAID conï¬guration: 1. From the Man age ment Me nu, hi ghli ght Con ï¬gu re, the n p ress <E nte r>. 2. Use the arrow keys to select View/A dd Con ï¬gur ati on, then press <Enter>. 3. The ARRAY SEL ECT ION MEN U displays the available drives connected to the SATA ports. Select the drive(s) you want to include in the RAID set, then press <SpaceBar>. When selected, the drive indicator changes from READ Y to ONL IN A [X] -[Y ], where X is the array number, and Y is the drive number. The information of the selected hard disk drive displays at the bottom of the screen.
5 - 2 0 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 4. Select all the drives required for the RAID set, then press <Enter>. The conï¬gurable array appears on screen. 5. Press <F10>, select the conï¬gurable array, then press <SpaceBar>. The logical drive information appears including a Logical Drive menu that allows you to change the logical drive parameters.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 2 1 6. Follow steps 6 to 7 of the Creating a RAID set: Using Easy Conï¬guration section. 7. Select Size from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 8. Key in the desired logical drive size, then press <Enter>. 9. Follow steps 8 to 12 of the Creating a RAID set : Using Easy Conï¬guration section to add the new RAID conï¬guration.
5 - 2 2 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 5 . 3 . 3 I n i t i a l i z i n g t h e l o g i c a l d r i v e s After creating the RAID set(s), you must initialize the logical drives. You may initialize the logical drives of a RAID set(s) using the Initialize or Objects command in the Management Menu. U s i n g t h e I n i t i a l i z e c o m m a n d To initialize the logical drive using the Initialize command: 1. From the Management Menu, highlight Initialize, then press <Enter>. 2. The screen displays the available RAID set(s) and prompts you to select the logical drive to initialize. Use the arrow keys to select the logical drive from the Logical Drive selection, then press <Enter>.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 2 3 3. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select Yes from the Initialize? dialog box, then press <Enter>. You may also press <F10> to initialize the drive without conï¬rmation. Initializing a logical drive(s) erases all data on the drive. 4. A progress bar appears on screen. If desired, press <Esc> to abort initialization.
5 - 2 4 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 5. When initialization is completed, press <Esc>. U s i n g t h e O b j e c t s c o m m a n d To initialize the logical drives using the Objects command: 1. From the Management Menu, highlight Objects, then press <Enter>.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 2 5 2. Select Logical Drive from the Objects sub-menu, then press <Enter>. 3. Select the logical drive to initialize from the Logical Drives sub-menu, then press <Enter>. 4. Select Initialize from the pop-up menu, then press <Enter> to start initialization.
5 - 2 6 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 5. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select Yes from the Initialize? dialog box, then press <Enter>. You may also press <F10> to initialize the drive without conï¬rmation. 6. A progress bar appears on screen. If desired, press <Esc> to abort initialization. 7. When initialization is completed, press <Esc>.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 2 7 5 . 3 . 4 R e b u i l d i n g f a i l e d d r i v e s You can manually rebuild failed hard disk drives using the Rebuild or Objects command in the Management Menu. U s i n g t h e R e b u i l d c o m m a n d To rebuild a failed hard disk drive using the Rebuild command: 1. From the Management Menu, highlight Rebuild, then press <Enter>. 2. The PHYSICAL DRIVES SELECTION MENU displays the available drives connected to the SATA ports. Select the drive you want to rebuild, then press <SpaceBar>.
5 - 2 8 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 3. After selecting the drive to rebuild, press <F10>. The indicator for the selected drive now shows RBLD. 4. When prompted, press <Y> to to rebuild the drive. 5. When rebuild is complete, press any key to continue. U s i n g t h e O b j e c t s c o m m a n d To rebuild a failed hard disk drive using the Objects command: 1. From the Management Menu, select Objects , then select Physical Drive from the menu. 2. Use the arrow keys to select the physical drive you want to rebuild, then press <Enter>. 3. Select Rebuild from the pop-up menu, then press <Enter>. 4. When prompted, press <Y> to to rebuild the drive. 5. When rebuild is complete, press any key to continue.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 2 9 5 . 3 . 5 C h e c k i n g t h e d r i v e s f o r d a t a c o n s i s t e n c y You can check and verify the accuracy of data redundancy in the selected logical drive. The utility can automatically detect and/or detect and correct any differences in data redundancy depending on the selected option in the Objects > Adapter menu. The Check Consistency command is available only for logical drives included in a RAID 1 set. U s i n g t h e C h e c k C o n s i s t e n c y To check data consistency using the Check Consistency command: 1. From the Management Menu, select Check Consistency , then press <Enter>. 2. The screen displays the available RAID set(s) and prompts you to select the logical drive to check. Use the arrow keys to select the logical drive from the Logical Drive selection, then press <Enter>.
5 - 3 0 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 3. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select Yes from the Consistency Check dialog box, then press <Enter>. You may also press <F10> to check the drive consistency. A progress bar appears on screen. 4. While checking the disk consistency, press <Esc> to display the following options. ⢠Stop - Stops the consistency check. The utility stores the percentage of disk checked. When you restart checking, it continues from the last percentage completed rather than from zero percent. ⢠Continue - Continues the consistency check. ⢠Abort - Aborts the consistency check. When you restart checking, it continues from zero percent. 5. When checking is complete, press any key to continue.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 3 1 U s i n g t h e O b j e c t s c o m m a n d To check data consistency using the Objects command: 1. From the Management Menu, select Objects , then select Logical Drive from the menu. 2. Use the arrow keys to select the logical drive you want to check, then press <Enter>. 3 . Se le ct Check Consistency f ro m th e po p- up m en u , th en p re s s < En te r> . 4. When prompted, press <Y> to to check the drive. 5. When checking is complete, press any key to continue.
5 - 3 2 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 5 . 3 . 6 D e l e t i n g a R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n To delete a RAID conï¬guration: 1. From the Management Menu, select Conï¬gure > Clear Conï¬ guration, then press <Enter>. 2. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select Yes from the Clear Conï¬guration? dialog box, then press <Enter>. The utility clears the current array. 3. Press any key to continue.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 3 3 5 . 3 . 7 S e l e c t i n g t h e b o o t d r i v e f r o m a R A I D s e t You must have created a new RAID conï¬guration before you can select the boot drive from a RAID set. Refer to the Creating a RAID set: Using New Conï¬guration section for details. To select the boot drive from a RAID set: 1. From the Management Menu, select Conï¬gure > Select Boot Drive , then press <Enter>. 2. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select the bootable logical drive from the list, then press <Enter>. 3. The logical drive is selected as boot drive. Press any key to continue.
5 - 3 4 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 5 . 3 . 8 E n a b l i n g t h e W r i t e C a c h e You may enable the RAID controllerʼs WriteCache option to improve the data transmission performance. Wh en y ou e nab le W rite Cac he , yo u ma y l os e da ta w hen a p ow er i nte rr up tion oc cu rs w hil e tr an smit tin g or e xcha ngi ng d at a am ong t he dri ves . To enable WriteCache: 1. From the Management Menu, select Objects > Adapter , then press <Enter> to display the adapter properties. 2. Select WriteCache, then press <Enter> to turn the option On (enabled). 3. When ï¬nished, press any key to continue. 5.4 Global Array Manager You may also create a RAID set(s) in Windows ® operating environment using the Global Array Manager (GAM) application. The GAM application is available from the motherboard support CD. Refer to the GAM user guide in the motherboard support CD for details.
6 Driver installation This chapter provides information on RAID, LAN and VGA driver installation for this motherboard.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C Chapter summary 6 6.1 RAID driver installation .......................................................... 6-1 6.2 LAN driver installation ........................................................ 6-11 6.3 VGA driver installation ........................................................ 6-15 6.4 Management applications and utilities installation .............. 6-17
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 6 - 1 A) Fre eDO S co mman d pr om pt B) Create ICH7R LSI MegaRAID IDE Driver for Windows Driver Disk C) Create ICH7R LSI MegaRAID IDE Driver for RHEL3UP6 driver D) Create ICH7R Intel Matrix Storage for Windows driver disk E) Create LSI Logic Fusion-MPT MiniPort for Win2K driver F) Create LSI Logic Fusion-MPT MiniPort for Win2K3 32 bit driver G) Broadcom ASF Firmware Update Please choose A To G: 6.1 RAID driver installation After creating the RAID sets for your server system, you are now ready to install an operating system to the independent hard disk drive or bootable array. This part provides instructions on how to install the RAID controller drivers during OS installation. 6 . 1 . 1 C r e a t i n g a R A I D d r i v e r d i s k You may have to use another system to create the RAID driver disk from the system/motherboard support CD or from the Internet. A ï¬oppy disk with the RAID driver is required when installing Windows ® 2000 or Red Hat ® Enterprise ver. 3.0/SuSE operating system on a hard disk drive that is included in a RAID set. You can create a RAID driver disk in DOS (using the Makedisk application in the support CD). To create a RAID driver disk in DOS environment: 1. Place the motherboard support CD in the optical drive. 2. Restart the computer, then enter the BIOS Setup. 3. Select the optical drive as the ï¬rst boot priority to boot from the support CD. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup. 4. Restart the computer. 5. Press any key when prompted to boot from CD. The Makedisk menu appears. Loading FreeDOS FAT KERNEL GO! Press any key to boot from CDROM... 6. Place a blank, high-density ï¬oppy disk to the ï¬ oppy disk drive, then select the type of RAID driver disk you want to create by typing the number before the option 7. Press <Enter>. 8. Follow screen instructions to create the driver disk. For sys tems wit h R ed H at ® Enterprise versions that are not listed in the Makedisk menu, explore the support CD and copy the RAID driver disk from the following path: \Drivers\ICH7R\LSI\Linux.
6 - 2 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n W i n d o w s ® 2 0 0 0 / 2 0 0 3 S e r v e r To create a RAID driver disk in Windows ® 2000/2003 Server environment: 1. Restart the system from the hard disk drive, then place the system/ motherboard support CD in the optical drive. 2. Browse the contents of the support CD to locate the driver disk utility. The 32-bit OS RAID driver disk for the Intel ® ICH7R is located in: \Drivers\ICH7R\Intel\Matrix\Makedisk\F6ï¬py32 The 64-bit OS RAID driver disk for the Intel ® ICH7R is located in: \Drivers\ICH7R\Intel\Matrix\Makedisk\F6ï¬py64 3. Insert a formatted high-density ï¬oppy disk to the ï¬oppy disk drive. 4. Follow screen instructions to complete the process. 5. After creating a RAID driver disk, eject the ï¬ oppy disk, then write-protect it to prevent computer virus infection.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 6 - 3 6 . 1 . 2 I n s t a l l i n g t h e R A I D c o n t r o l l e r d r i v e r W i n d o w s ® 2 0 0 0 / 2 0 0 3 S e r v e r O S D u r i n g W i n d o w s ® 2 0 0 0 / 2 0 0 3 S e r v e r O S i n s t a l l a t i o n To install the RAID controller driver when installing Windows ® 2000/2003 Server OS: 1. Boot the computer using the Windows® 2000/2003 Server installation CD. The Windows ® 2000/2003 Setup starts. 2. Press <F6> when the message âPress F6 if you need to install a third party SCSI or RAID driver...â appears at the bottom of the screen. 3. When prompted, press <S> to specify an additional device.
6 - 4 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 4. Insert the RAID driver disk you created earlier to the ï¬ oppy disk drive, then press <Enter>. 5. Select the RAID controller driver from the list, then press <Enter>. There are two items to select: L S I L o g i c S A T A R A I D Select âLSI Logic Embedded SATA RAIDâ for Windows 2000 or 32bit Windows 2003 Server OS from the list, then press <Enter>. For 64bit Windows 2003 Server OS, please select âLSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID ( Intel IA32E )â item.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 6 - 5 T o a n e x i s t i n g W i n d o w s ® 2 0 0 0 / 2 0 0 3 S e r v e r O S To install the RAID controller driver on an existing Windows ® 2000/2003 Server OS: 1. Restart the computer, then log on with Administrator privileges. 2. Windows ® automatically detects the RAID controller and displays a New Hardware Found window. Click Cancel. 3. Right-click the My Computer icon on the Windows ® desktop , then select Properties from the menu. 4. Click the Hardware tab, then click the Device Manager button to display the list of devices installed in the system. I n t e l M a t r i x S t o r a g e Select âIntel(R) 82801GR/ GH SATA RAID Control ler (Desktop ICH7RDH)â for Intel Matrix Storage RAID mode from the list, then press <Enter>. If you conï¬gured SATA as AHCI Mode in the BIOS setup utility of IDE Conï¬guration, ï¬rst install the Intel SATA AHCI Driver during windows setup. Then, select the âIntel(R) 82801GR/GH SATA AHCI Controller (Desktop ICH7RDH)â from the list. Refer to section â6.1.1 Creating a RAID driver diskâ to create the Intel SATA Driver for windows system. 6. The Windows ® 2000/2003 Setup loads the RAID controller drivers from the RAID driver disk. When prompted, press <Enter> to continue installation. 7. Setup then proceeds with the OS installation. Follow screen instructions to continue.
6 - 6 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 5. Right-click the RAID controller item, then select Properties. 6. Click the Driver tab, then click the Update Driver button. 7. The Upgrade Device Driver Wizard window appears. Click Next. 8. Insert the RAID driver disk you created earlier to the ï¬ oppy disk drive. 9. Select the option âSearch for a suitable driver for my device (recommended)â, then click Next. 10. The wizard searches the RAID controller drivers. When found, click Next to install the drivers. 11. Click Finish after the driver installation is done.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 6 - 7 To verify the RAID controller driver installation: 1. Right-click the My Computer icon on the Windows ® desktop , then select Properties from the menu. 2. Click the Hardware tab, then click the Device Manager button. 3. Click the â â sign before the item SCSI and RAID controllers. When you installed the Intel ® ICH7R SATA RAID controller driver, the Intel(R) 82801GR/GH SATA RAID Controller item should appear. 4. Right-click the RAID controller driver item, then select Properties from the menu. 5. Click the Driver tab, then click the Driver Details button to display the RAID controller drivers. 6. Click OK when ï¬nished. When you installed the LSI logic embedded SATA RAID driver, the LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID item should appear.
6 - 8 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n R e d H a t ® E n t e r p r i s e v e r . 3 . 0 To install the RAID controller driver when installing Red Hat ® Enterprise ver. 3.0 OS: 1. Boot the system from the Red Hat ® Installation CD. 2. At the boot:, type linux dd , then press <Enter>.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 6 - 9 4. Select fd0 using the <Tab> key when asked to select the driver disk source. Press <Tab> to move the cursor to OK, then press <Enter>. 3. Select Yes using the <Tab> key when asked if you have the driver disk. Press <Enter>
6 - 1 0 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 6. When asked if you will load additional RAID controller drivers, select No, then press <Enter>. 7. Follow screen instructions to continue the OS installation. 5. When prompted, insert the Red Hat ® Enterprise ver. 3.0 RAID driver disk to the ï¬oppy disk drive, select OK, then press <Enter>. The drivers for the RAID controller are installed to the system.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 6 - 1 1 6.2 LAN driver installation This section provides instructions on how to install the Broadcom ® Gigabit LAN controller drivers. 6 . 2 . 1 W i n d o w s ® 2 0 0 0 / 2 0 0 3 S e r v e r To install the Broadcom ® Gigabit LAN controller driver on a Windows ® 2000/2003 Server OS: 1. Restart the computer, then log on with Administrator privileges. 2. Insert the motherboard/system support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer. ⢠Wi nd ows ® automatically detects the LAN controllers and displays a New Hardware Found window. Click Cancel to close this window. ⢠If Autorun is NOT enabled in your computer, browse the contents of the support CD to locate the ï¬le ASSETUP.EXE from the BIN folder. Double-click the ASSETUP.EXE to run the CD. 3. Click the Broadcom 5753 Driver option to begin installation.
6 - 1 2 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 4. Click Next when the InstallShield Wizard window appears. Follow screen instructions to continue installation.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 6 - 1 3 6 . 2 . 2 R e d H a t ® E n t e r p r i s e v e r . 3 . 0 Follow these instructions when installing the Broadcom ® Gigabit LAN controller base driver for the Red Hat ® Enterprise ver. 3.0 operating system. I n s t a l l i n g t h e s o u r c e R P M p a c k a g e To install the source RPM package: 1. Install the source RPM package: rpm -ivh bcm5700-<version>.src.rpm 2. Change the directory to the RPM path and build the binary driver for your kernel: cd /usr/src/{redhat,OpenLinux,turbo,packages,rpm ..} rpm -bb SPECS/bcm5700.spec or rpmbuild -bb SPECS/ bcm5700.spec The RPM path is different for different Linux distributions. 3. Install the newly built package (driver and man page): rpm -ivh RPMS/i386/bcm5700-<version>.i386.rpm For 2.2.x kernels, the driver is installed in: /lib/modules/<kernel_version>/net/bcm5700.o For 2.4.x kernels, the driver is installed in: /lib/modules/<kernel_version>/kernel/drivers/net/ bcm5700.o For 2.4.x kernels with bcm5700 driver patched in, the driver is installed in: /lib/modules/<kernel_version>/kernel/drivers/net/bcm/ bcm5700.o or /lib/modules/<kernel_version>/kernel/drivers/addon/ bcm5700/bcm5700.o 4. Load the driver: insmod bcm5700 5. Refer to Linux distribution documentation to conï¬ gure the network protocol and address. You need the force option when installing the driver on some distributions that has an older version of the driver.
6 - 1 4 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n B u i l d i n g t h e d r i v e r f r o m t h e T A R f i l e To build the driver from the TAR ï¬le: 1. Create a directory and extract the TAR ï¬ les: tar xvzf bcm5700-<version>.tar.gz 2. Build the driver bcm5700.o as a loadable module for the running kernel: cd bcm5700-<version>/src make 3. Test the driver by loading it: insmod bcm5700.o 4. Install the driver and man page: make install See the RPM instructions on the previous page for the location of the installed driver. 5. Refer to Red Hat distribution documentation to conï¬ gure the network protocol and address.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 6 - 1 5 6.3 VGA driver installation This section provides instructions on how to install the ATI ® RAGE XL Video Graphics Adapter (VGA) driver. 6 . 3 . 1 W i n d o w s ® 2 0 0 0 S e r v e r You need to manually install the ATI ® RAGE XL VGA driver on a Windows ® 2000 Server operating system. To install the ATI ® RAGE XL VGA driver: 1. Restart the computer, then log on with Administrator privileges. 2. Insert the motherboard/system support CD to the optical drive. The support CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer. Windows ® automatically detects the LAN controller and displays a New Hardware Found window. Click Cancel to close this window. 3. Cli ck the i tem A TI Ra ge XL Di sp lay Dr ive r fro m the Dr ive rs me nu . 4. The ATI W ind ows 20 00 Dri ve r window appears. Click Ne xt. Follow screen instructions to complete installation.
6 - 1 6 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 6 . 3 . 3 R e d H a t ® E n t e r p r i s e v e r . 3 . 0 The Red Hat ® Enterprise ver. 3.0 operating system automatically recognizes the ATI ® RAGE XL VGA driver during system installation. There is no need to install an additional driver(s) to support the onboard VGA. 6 . 3 . 2 W i n d o w s ® 2 0 0 3 S e r v e r The Windows ® 2003 Server operating system automatically recognizes the ATI ® RAGE XL VGA driver during system installation. There is no need to install an additional driver(s) to support the onboard VGA. V e r i f y i n g t h e V G A d r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n To verify if the ATI ® RAGE XL VGA drivers are properly installed in a Windows ® 2000/2003 Server operating system: 1. Right-click the My Computer icon on the Windows ® desktop, then select Properties from the menu. 2. Click the Hardware tab, then click the Device Manager button. 3. Click the â â sign before the item Display adapters . The ATI Technologies Inc. RAGE XL PCI item should appear. 4. Right-click the ATI Technologies Inc. RAGE XL PCI item, then select Properties from the menu. 5. Click the Driver tab, then click the Driver Details button to display the VGA drivers. 6. Click OK when ï¬nished.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 6 - 1 7 6.4 Management applications and utilities installation The support CD that came with the motherboard package contains the drivers, management applications, and utilities that you can install to avail all motherboard features. The contents of the support CD are subject to change at any time without notice. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) for updates. 6 . 4 . 1 R u n n i n g t h e s u p p o r t C D Place the support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer. If Autorun is NOT enabled in your computer, browse the contents of the support CD to locate the ï¬le ASSETUP.EXE from the BIN folder. Double- click the ASSETUP.EXE to run the CD. 6 . 4 . 2 D r i v e r s m e n u The Dri ver s m enu sho ws the ava ila ble dev ice dr ive rs i f t he syst em det ects ins tall ed dev ice s. I nst all the ne ces sar y dr ive rs to a cti vat e t he d evi ces . The screen display and driver options vary under different operating system versions.
6 - 1 8 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 6 . 4 . 3 M a n a g e m e n t S o f t w a r e m e n u The Management Software menu displays the available network and server monitoring applications. Click on an item to install. 6 . 4 . 4 U t i l i t i e s m e n u The Utilities menu displays the software applications and utilities that the motherboard supports. Click on an item to install. 6 . 4 . 5 C o n t a c t i n f o r m a t i o n Click the Contact tab to display the ASUS contact information. You can also ï¬nd this information on the inside front cover of this user guide.
A The appendix includes additional information that you may refer to when conï¬guring the motherboard. Reference information
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C Appendix summary A A.1 Intel ® EM64T ......................................................................... A-1 A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep ® Technology (EIST) .................... A-1 A.3 Intel ® Hyper-Threading Technology ...................................... A-3 A.4 Block diagram ....................................................................... A-4
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C A - 1 A.1 Intel ® EM64T ⢠The motherboard is fully compatible with Intel ® Pentium ® 4 LGA775 processors running on 32-bit operating systems. ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS ï¬le that supports EM64T. You can download the latest BIOS ï¬le from the ASUS website (www.asus. com/support/download/) if you need to update the BIOS ï¬le. See Chapter 4 for details. ⢠Visit www.intel.com for more information on the EM64T feature. ⢠Vi si t ww w.m ic ro so ft.c om fo r mo re i nfo rm at ion on Wi nd ow s ® 64-bit OS. U s i n g t h e I n t e l ® E M 6 4 T f e a t u r e To use the Intel ® EM64T feature: 1. Install an Intel ® Pentium ® 4 CPU that supports the Intel ® EM64T. 2. Install a 64-bit operating system (Windows ® Server 2003 x64 Edition). 3. Install the 64-bit drivers for the motherboard components and devices from the support CD. 4. Install the 64-bit drivers for expansion cards or add-on devices, if any. Refe r t o th e ex pan sion car d or ad d-on dev ice (s) docu men tati on, or v isi t the rel ated web sit e, t o ve rify if the car d/d evic e su ppo rts a 64 -bi t sy stem . A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep ® Technology (EIST) ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS ï¬le that supports EIST. You can download the latest BIOS ï¬le from the ASUS website (www. asus.com/support/download/) if you need to update the BIOS. See Chapter 4 for details. ⢠Visit www.intel.com for more information on the EIST feature. A . 2 . 1 S y s t e m r e q u i r e m e n t s Before using EIST, check your system if it meets the following requirements: ⢠I ntel ® Pentium ® 4 processor with EIST support ⢠BIOS ï¬le with EIST support ⢠Operating system with EIST support (Windows ® Server 2003 SP1/ Linux 2.6 kernel or later versions)
A - 2 A p p e n d i x A : R e f e r e n c e i n f o r m a t i o n A . 2 . 2 U s i n g t h e E I S T To use the EIST feature: 1. Tur n o n t he co mp ute r, th en en te r t he BI OS Se tup . 2. Go to the A dv anc ed Me nu, h ig hli ght C PU Co nï¬g ur ati on , then press <Enter>. 3. Set the Int el (R) Sp ee dSt ep Te ch nol og y item to [Automatic], then press <Enter>. See page 4-22 for details. 4. Pre ss <F1 0> to s ave yo ur ch an ges a nd ex it th e B IOS s etu p. 5. After the computer restarts, right click on a blank space on the desktop, then select Pr op ert ie s from the pop-up menu. 6. When the Dis pl ay Pr ope rti es window appears, click the Sc re en Sa ver tab. 7. Click the Pow er button on the Monitor power section to open the Po wer O pti on s P ro per ti es window. 8 . O n t h e Po we r s che me s se c t i o n , c l i c k , t h e n s e l e c t a ny o p t i o n except Home/Ofï¬ce Desktop or Always On. 9. Click App ly , then click OK. 10. Close the Di spl ay Pr op ert ie s window. Af ter y ou ad jus t the p owe r sc hem e, th e CPU i nte rna l fr equ en cy sl igh tl y d ecr ea ses wh en th e C PU lo ad ing is l ow. The screen displays and procedures may vary depending on the operating system.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C A - 3 A.3 Intel ® Hyper-Threading Technology ⢠The motherboard supports Intel ® Pentium ® 4 LGA775 processors with Hyper-Threading Technology. ⢠Hy pe r-Th rea di ng T echn olo gy i s supp ort ed u nder 2003 Server and Linux 2.4.x (kernel) and later versions only. Under Linux, use the Hyper-Threading compiler to compile the code. If you are using any other operating systems, disable the Hyper-Threading Techonology item in the BIOS to ensure system stability and performance. ⢠Make sure to enable the Hyper-Threading Technology item in BIOS before installing a supported operating system. ⢠For more information on Hyper-Threading Technology, visit www. intel.com/info/hyperthreading. U s i n g t h e H y p e r - T h r e a d i n g T e c h n o l o g y To use the Hyper-Threading Technology: 1. Install an Intel ® Pentium ® 4 CPU that supports Hyper-Threading Technology. 2. Power up the system and enter the BIOS Setup. Under the Advanced Menu, make sure that the item Hyper-Threading Technology is set to Enabled. Se e p ag e 4 -22 for d eta il s. The BIOS item appears only if you installed a CPU that supports Hyper-Threading Techonology. 3. Restart the computer.
A - 4 A p p e n d i x A : R e f e r e n c e i n f o r m a t i o n A.4 Block diagram Northbridge Intel ® Mukilteo LPC-Bus 2x DDR2 533/667 DIMM Slots DMI PCI-E X8 4xDDR2 533/667 SDRAM (max. 8 GB) SMBus H/W monitors W83792AD Slot 3 PCI-E X1 BCM5753 Smithfield/Cendar Mill Processor with 800/1066MHz system bus Southbridge Intel ® ICH7R W83627EHF Keyboard Serial Port *2 Floppy Mouse Parallel Port BIOS Flash 8 Mbit MUX Fan *6 Voltage * PCI- E X4 X8 Slot 2 Slot 4 X16 Slot 1 2x DDR2 533/667 DIMM Slots PCI 32Bit/33MHz ATI Rage XL SATA All *4 IDE *1 USB 2.0*8 Super I/O
i i E 2 5 0 1 R e v i s e d E d i t i o n V 2 M a r c h 2 0 0 6 Copyright © 2006 ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. (âASUSâ). Product warranty or service will not be extended if: (1) the product is repaired, modiï¬ed or altered, unless such repair, modiï¬cation of alteration is authorized in writing by ASUS; or (2) the serial number of the product is defaced or missing. ASUS PROVIDES THIS MANUAL âAS ISâ WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ASUS, ITS DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF USE OR DATA, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS AND THE LIKE), EVEN IF ASUS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY DEFECT OR ERROR IN THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT. SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL ARE FURNISHED FOR INFORMATIONAL USE ONLY, AND ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY ASUS. ASUS ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS OR INACCURACIES THAT MAY APPEAR IN THIS MANUAL, INCLUDING THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE DESCRIBED IN IT. Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identiï¬cation or explanation and to the ownersʼ beneï¬t, without intent to infringe.
i i i Contents Notices ................................................................................................ vi Safety information ............................................................................. vii About this guide ................................................................................. viii P5MT-MX/C speciï¬cations summary .................................................... x C h a p t e r 1 : P r o d u c t i n t r o d u c t i o n 1.1 Welcome! .............................................................................. 1-1 1.2 Package contents ................................................................. 1-1 1.3 Special features .................................................................... 1-2 1.3.1 Product highlights ................................................... 1-2 1.3.2 Innovative ASUS features ....................................... 1-4 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2.1 Before you proceed .............................................................. 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview .......................................................... 2-2 2.2.1 Placement direction ................................................ 2-2 2.2.2 Screw holes ............................................................. 2-2 2.2.3 Motherboard layout ................................................ 2-3 2.2.4 Layout contents ..................................................... 2-4 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) .............................................. 2-6 2.3.1 Installing the CPU .................................................... 2-6 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and fan ......................... 2-9 2.3.3 Uninstalling the CPU heatsink and fan ................... 2-11 2.4 System memory .................................................................. 2-13 2.4.1 Overview ............................................................... 2-13 2.4.2 Memory conï¬gurations ......................................... 2-13 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM ................................................... 2-15 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM .................................................. 2-15 2.5 Expansion slots ................................................................... 2-16 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card .................................. 2-16 2.5.2 Conï¬guring an expansion card .............................. 2-16 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments ........................................... 2-17 2.5.4 PCI Express x16 slot ............................................. 2-18 2.5.4 PCI Express x8 slot ............................................... 2-18 2.5.5 PCI slots ................................................................ 2-18 2.6 Jumpers .............................................................................. 2-19
i v Contents 2.7 Connectors ......................................................................... 2-24 2.7.1 Rear panel connectors .......................................... 2-24 2.7.2 Internal connectors ............................................... 2-25 C h a p t e r 3 : P o w e r i n g u p 3.1 Starting up for the ï¬rst time ................................................ 3-1 3.2 Turning off the computer ..................................................... 3-2 3.2.1 Using the OS shut down function ........................... 3-2 3.2.2 Using the dual function power switch ..................... 3-2 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ........................................ 4-1 4.1.1 Creating a bootable ï¬oppy disk .............................. 4-1 4.1.2 AFUDOS utility ........................................................ 4-2 4.1.3 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ................................ 4-5 4.1.4 ASUS Update utility ................................................ 4-7 4.2 BIOS setup program ............................................................ 4-10 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen ................................................. 4-11 4.2.2 Menu bar ............................................................... 4-11 4.2.3 Navigation keys ..................................................... 4-11 4.2.4 Menu items ........................................................... 4-12 4.2.5 Sub-menu items .................................................... 4-12 4.2.6 Conï¬guration ï¬elds ............................................... 4-12 4.2.7 Pop-up window ...................................................... 4-12 4.2.8 Scroll bar ............................................................... 4-12 4.2.9 General help .......................................................... 4-12 4.3 Main menu ........................................................................... 4-13 4.3.1 System Time ........................................................ 4-13 4.3.2 System Date ........................................................ 4-13 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A ............................................... 4-13 4.3.4 Primary, Third, and Fourth IDE Master/Slave ........ 4-14 4.3.5 IDE Conï¬guration .................................................. 4-15 4.3.6 System Information .............................................. 4-17 4.4 Advanced menu .................................................................. 4-18 4.4.1 USB Conï¬guration ................................................. 4-18 4.4.2 MPS Conï¬guration ................................................. 4-19 4.4.3 Remote Access Conï¬guration ............................... 4-20
v Contents 4.4.4 CPU Conï¬guration ................................................. 4-21 4.4.5 Chipset .................................................................. 4-23 4.4.6 Onboard Devices Conï¬guration ............................. 4-25 4.4.7 PCI PnP .................................................................. 4-26 4.5 Power menu ........................................................................ 4-27 4.5.1 ACPI APIC Support ................................................ 4-27 4.5.2 APM Conï¬guration ................................................ 4-28 4.5.3 Hardware Monitor .................................................. 4-29 4.6 Boot menu .......................................................................... 4-31 4.6.1 Boot Device Priority .............................................. 4-31 4.6.2 Boot Settings Conï¬guration ................................. 4-32 4.6.3 Security ................................................................. 4-33 4.7 Exit menu ............................................................................ 4-35 C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n s 5.1 RAID conï¬guration ................................................................ 5-1 5.1.1 RAID deï¬nitions ....................................................... 5-1 5.1.2 Installing Serial ATA hard disks ............................... 5-2 5.1.3 Setting RAID item in BIOS ....................................... 5-2 5.1.4 RAID conï¬guration utility ........................................ 5-2 5.2 Intel Matrix Storage Manager option ROM utility .................. 5-3 5.2.1 Creating a RAID 0 set (striped) .............................. 5-4 5.2.2 Creating a RAID 1 set (mirrored) ............................ 5-6 5.2.3 Creating a RAID 10 set (RAID 0 1) ...................... 5-7 5.2.4 Creating a RAID 5 set (parity) ................................ 5-8 5.2.5 Deleting a RAID set ............................................... 5-10 5.2.6 Resetting Disks to Non-RAID ................................. 5-11 5.2.7 Exiting the Intel Matrix Storage Manager utility ...................................................... 5-11 5.3 LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility .................... 5-12 5.3.1 Creating a RAID set ............................................... 5-13 5.3.2 Adding or viewing a RAID conï¬guration ................ 5-19 5.3.3 Initializing the logical drives .................................. 5-22 5.3.4 Rebuilding failed drives ......................................... 5-27 5.3.5 Checking the drives for data consistency ............. 5-29 5.3.6 Deleting a RAID conï¬guration ............................... 5-32
v i 5.3.7 Selecting the boot drive from a RAID set ............. 5-33 5.3.8 Enabling the WriteCache ....................................... 5-34 5.4 Global Array Manager .......................................................... 5-34 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 6.1 RAID driver installation .......................................................... 6-1 6.1.1 Creating a RAID driver disk ..................................... 6-1 6.1.2 Installing the RAID controller driver ........................ 6-3 6.2 LAN driver installation ........................................................ 6-11 6.2.1 Windows ® 2000/2003 Server .............................. 6-11 6.2.2 Red Hat ® Enterprise ver. 3.0 ................................. 6-13 6.3 VGA driver installation ........................................................ 6-15 6.3.1 Windows ® 2000 Server ......................................... 6-15 6.3.2 Windows ® 2003 Server ......................................... 6-16 6.3.3 Red Hat ® Enterprise ver. 3.0 ................................. 6-16 6.4 Management applications and utilites installation .............. 6-17 6.4.1 Running the support CD ........................................ 6-17 6.4.2 Drivers menu ......................................................... 6-17 6.4.3 Management Software menu ................................ 6-18 6.4.4 Utilities menu ........................................................ 6-18 6.4.5 Contact information .............................................. 6-18 A p p e n d i x : R e f e r e n c e i n f o r m a t i o n A.1 Intel ® EM64T ......................................................................... A-1 A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep ® Technology (EIST) .................... A-1 A.2.1 System requirements .............................................. A-1 A.2.2 Using the EIST ......................................................... A-2 A.3 Intel ® Hyper-Threading Technology ...................................... A-3 A.4 Block diagram ....................................................................... A-4
v i i Notices F e d e r a l C o m m u n i c a t i o n s C o m m i s s i o n S t a t e m e n t This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference, and ⢠This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with manufacturerʼs instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. ⢠Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. C a n a d i a n D e p a r t m e n t o f C o m m u n i c a t i o n s S t a t e m e n t This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. The use of shielded cables for connection of the monitor to the graphics card is required to assure compliance with FCC regulations. Changes or modiï¬cations to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the userʼs authority to operate this equipment.
v i i i Safety information E l e c t r i c a l s a f e t y ⢠To prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet before relocating the system. ⢠When adding or removing devices to or from the system, ensure that the power cables for the devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power cables from the existing system before you add a device. ⢠Before connecting or removing signal cables from the motherboard, ensure that all power cables are unplugged. ⢠Seek professional assistance before using an adapter or extension cord. These devices could interrupt the grounding circuit. ⢠Make sure that your power supply is set to the correct voltage in your area. If you are not sure about the voltage of the electrical outlet you are using, contact your local power company. ⢠If the power supply is broken, do not try to fix it by yourself. Contact a qualified service technician or your retailer. O p e r a t i o n s a f e t y ⢠Before installing the motherboard and adding devices on it, carefully read all the manuals that came with the package. ⢠Before using the product, make sure all cables are correctly connected and the power cables are not damaged. If you detect any damage, contact your dealer immediately. ⢠To avoid short circuits, keep paper clips, screws, and staples away from connectors, slots, sockets and circuitry. ⢠Avoid dust, humidity, and temperature extremes. Do not place the product in any area where it may become wet. ⢠Place the product on a stable surface. ⢠If you encounter technical problems with the product, contact a qualified service technician or your retailer. The symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the product (electrical and electronic equipment) should not be placed in municipal waste. Check local regulations for disposal of electronic products.
i x About this guide This user guide contains the information you need when installing and conï¬guring the motherboard. H o w t h i s g u i d e i s o r g a n i z e d This manual contains the following parts: ⢠C h a p t e r 1 : P r o d u c t i n t r o d u c t i o n This chapter describes the features of the motherboard and the new technology it supports. ⢠C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the switches, jumpers, and connectors on the motherboard. ⢠C h a p t e r 3 : P o w e r i n g u p This chapter describes the power up sequence, the vocal POST messages, and ways of shutting down the system. ⢠C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p Tells how to change system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided. ⢠C h a p t e r 5 : R A I D s u p p o r t Provides information on RAID conï¬gurations for this motherboard. ⢠C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n This chapter provides information on RAID, LAN and VGA driver installation for this motherboard. ⢠A p p e n d i x : R e f e r e n c e i n f o r m a t i o n This appendix includes additional information that you may refer to when conï¬guring the motherboard. W h e r e t o f i n d m o r e i n f o r m a t i o n Refer to the following sources for additional information and for product and software updates. 1 . A S U S w e b s i t e s The ASUS website provides updated information on ASUS hardware and software products. Refer to the ASUS contact information. 2 . O p t i o n a l d o c u m e n t a t i o n Your product package may include optional documentation, such as warranty ï¬yers, that may have been added by your dealer. These documents are not part of the standard package.
x C o n v e n t i o n s u s e d i n t h i s g u i d e To make sure that you perform certain tasks properly, take note of the following symbols used throughout this manual. T y p o g r a p h y Bold text Indicates a menu or an item to select. Italics Used to emphasize a word or a phrase. <Key> Keys enclosed in the less-than and greater-than sign means that you must press the enclosed key. Example: <Enter> means that you must press the Enter or Return key. <Key1> <Key2> <Key3> If you must press two or more keys simultaneously, the key names are linked with a plus sign ( ). Example: <Ctrl> <Alt> <Del> Command Means that you must type the command exactly as shown, then supply the required item or value enclosed in brackets. Example: At the DOS prompt, type the command line: afudos /i[ï¬lename] afudos /iP5MT-MXC.ROM DANGER/WARNING: Information to prevent injury to yourself when trying to complete a task. CAUTION: Information to prevent damage to the components when trying to complete a task. NOTE: Tips and additional information to help you complete a task. IMPORTANT: Instructions that you MUST follow to complete a task.
x i P5MT-MX/C speciï¬cations summary (continued on the next page) C P U C h i p s e t F r o n t S i d e B u s M e m o r y E x p a n s i o n s l o t s S t o r a g e G r a p h i c s L A N U S B S p e c i a l f e a t u r e s B I O S f e a t u r e s R e a r p a n e l LGA775 socket for Intel ® Pentium ® Processor Extreme Edition/Intel ® Pentium ® D processor with Extended Memory 64-bit Technology (EM64T) Supports Intel ® Hyper-Threading Technology Northbridge: Intel ® E7230 Memory Controller Hub (MCH) Southbridge: Intel ® ICH7R 1066/800 MHz Dual-channel memory architecture 4 x 240-pin DIMM sockets support unbuffered ECC/Non-ECC 667/533 MHz DDR2 memory modules Supports 128 MB up to 8 GB of system memory 1 x PCI Exp re ss ⢠x16 s lo t 16 4P (x 8 li nk, PCI E xp re ss 1 .0a ) 1 x PCI Express⢠x8 slot 98P (x4 link, PCI Express 1.0a) 2 x PCI 33 MHz/32-bit/5V slots (PCI 2.3) Intel ® ICH7R Southbridge supports: - 2 x Ultra DMA 100/66/33 hard disk drives - 4 x Serial ATA II hard disks with RAID functionality using the Intel ® Matrix Storage (RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10, and RAID 5 conï¬guration), or the LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID controller (RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10) ATI ® RAGE-XL PCI-based VGA controller Embedded Broadcom BCM5753 G ig ab it L AN c on tr ol ler (PCI Express 1.0a speciï¬cations compliant) Intel ® ICH7R Southbridge supports: - 8 x USB 2.0/1.1 ports (two on the rear panel, three connectors at mid-board for up to six additional ports) ASUS Smart Fan ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS MyLogo2⢠AMI BIOS, 8 Mb FWH, Green, PnP, DMI2.0a, ACPI 2.0a, SMBIOS 2.3 1 x PS/2 keyboard port 1 x PS/2 mouse port 2 x USB 2.0 ports 1 x Serial (COM1) port 1 x LAN (RJ-45) port 1 x VGA port 1 x Parallel port
x i i P5MT-MX/C speciï¬cations summary 1 x Floppy disk drive connector 1 x Hard disk activity LED connector 1 x IDE connector 4 x Serial ATA connectors 2 x CPU fan connectors 4 x System fan connectors 1 x Serial port (COM2) connector 3 x USB connectors 1 x 24-pin ATX power connector 1 x 4-pin ATX 12 V power connector 1 x Backplane SMBus connector 1 x Chassis intrusion connector 1 x Ambient thermal sensor connector 1 x System panel connector SSI power supply (with 24-pin and 4-pin 12 V plugs) ATX 12V 2.0 compliant micro-ATX form factor: 9.6 â x 9.6 â (24.4 cm x 24.4 cm) Device drivers ASUS Update ASUS Server Web-based Management (ASWM) 2.0 I n t e r n a l c o n n e c t o r s P o w e r R e q u i r e m e n t F o r m F a c t o r S u p p o r t C D c o n t e n t s *Speciï¬cations are subject to change without notice.
1 Product introduction This chapter describes the motherboard features and the new technologies it supports.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C Chapter summary 1 1.1 Welcome! .............................................................................. 1-1 1.2 Package contents ................................................................. 1-1 1.3 Special features .................................................................... 1-2
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 1 - 1 1.1 Welcome! Thank you for buying an ASUS ® P5MT-MX/C motherboard! The motherboard delivers a host of new features and latest technologies, making it another standout in the long line of ASUS quality motherboards! Before you start installing the motherboard, and hardware devices on it, check the items in your package with the list below. 1.2 Package contents Check your motherboard package for the following items. Motherboard ASUS P5MT-MX/C motherboard Cables 2-in-1 disk drive cable 4 x Serial ATA signal cables 2 x Serial ATA power cables Accessories I/O shield Application CD ASUS motherboard support CD Documentation User guide If any of the above items is damaged or missing, contact your retailer.
1 - 2 C h a p t e r 1 : P r o d u c t i n t r o d u c t i o n 1.3 Special features 1 . 3 . 1 P r o d u c t h i g h l i g h t s L a t e s t p r o c e s s o r t e c h n o l o g y The motherboard comes with a 775-pin surface mount Land Grid Array (LGA) socket designed for the Intel ® Pentium ® Processor Extreme Edition and the Intel ® Pentium ® D processor in the 775-land package, with 1066/800 MHz Front Side Bus (FSB). See page 2-6 for details. I n t e l ® E 7 2 3 0 / I n t e l ® I C H 7 R c h i p s e t The Intel ® E7230 and the Intel ® ICH7R I/O controller hub (ICH) provide the vital interfaces for the motherboard. The uniprocessor server chipset integrates EM64T support and four Serial ATA ports enabled through the Serial ATA 3 Gb/s RAID controller to ensure data security and enable powerful multi-task processing. I n t e l ® E M 6 4 T The motherboard supports the Intel ® Hyper-Threading technology and incorporates the Extended Memory 64-bit Technology (EM64T). The Intel ® EM64T feature allows your system to run on 64-bit operating systems and access larger amounts of system memory for faster and more efï¬cient computing. D D R 2 m e m o r y s u p p o r t The motherboard supports DDR2 memory, which features data transfer rates of 667 MHz or 533 MHz to meet the higher bandwidth requirements of the latest 3D graphics, multimedia, and Internet applications. The dual-channel DDR2 architecture doubles the bandwidth of your system memory to boost system performance, eliminating bottlenecks with peak bandwidths of up to 10.7 GB/s. See page 2-13 for details. S e r i a l A T A I I t e c h n o l o g y The mot her boa rd supp ort s t he S eri al ATA II technology through the Serial ATA II interfaces controlled by the Intel ® ICH7R. The SATA II speciï¬cation allows for thinner, more ï¬exible cables with lower pin count, reduced voltage requirement, and up to 300 MB/s data transfer rate. See page 2-27 for details.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 1 - 3 P C I E x p r e s s ⢠i n t e r f a c e Th e m ot her bo ard f ull y s up por ts PC I Exp re ss, the latest I/O interconnect technology that speeds up the PCI bus. PCI Express features point-to-point serial interconnections between devices and allows higher clockspeeds by carrying data in packets. This high speed interface is software compatible with existing PCI speciï¬cations. See page 2-18 for details. G i g a b i t L A N s o l u t i o n The motherboard comes with an onboard Gigabit LAN controller to provide a total solution for your networking needs. The onboard Broadcom BCM5753 controller uses the PCI Express interface with a network throughput close to Gigabit bandwidth. See pages 2-21 and 2-24 for details. S e r i a l A T A R A I D s o l u t i o n Onboard RAID controllers provide the motherboard with RAID functionality. The Intel ® ICH7R allows RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, and RAID 10 conï¬guration for four Serial ATA connectors and supports the Intel ® Matrix Technology. See page 2-27 and Chapter 5 for details. U S B 2 . 0 t e c h n o l o g y The motherboard implements the Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0 speciï¬cation, dramatically increasing the connection speed from the 12 Mbps bandwidth on USB 1.1 to a fast 480 Mbps on USB 2.0. USB 2.0 is backward compatible with USB 1.1. See pages 2-20, 2-24 and 2-29 for details.
1 - 4 C h a p t e r 1 : P r o d u c t i n t r o d u c t i o n 1 . 3 . 2 I n n o v a t i v e A S U S f e a t u r e s A S U S S m a r t F a n t e c h n o l o g y The ASUS Smart Fan technology smartly adjusts the fan speeds according to the system loading to ensure quiet, cool, and efï¬cient operation. See page 4-30 for details. A S U S M y L o g o 2 ⢠This feature allows you to personalize and add style to your system with customizable boot logos. See page 4-32 for details. A S U S C r a s h F r e e B I O S 2 Th is fe atu re al lo ws you t o r es tor e the o rig in al BIO S dat a fro m the s upp or t CD in c ase w hen t he BI OS cod es an d dat a get co rr upt ed. T his p rot ec tio n el imi na tes t he ne ed to bu y a r epl ac eme nt RO M chi p. Se e p ag e 4-5 for details.
2 Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the jumpers and connectors on the motherboard.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C Chapter summary 2 2.1 Before you proceed .............................................................. 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview .......................................................... 2-2 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) .............................................. 2-6 2.4 System memory .................................................................. 2-13 2.5 Expansion slots ................................................................... 2-16 2.6 Jumpers .............................................................................. 2-19 2.7 Connectors ......................................................................... 2-24
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 1 Onboard LED The motherboard comes with a standby power LED. The green LED lights up to indicate that the system is ON, in sleep mode, or in soft-off mode. This is a reminder that you should shut down the system and unplug the power cable before removing or plugging in any motherboard component. The illustration below shows the location of the onboard LED. 2.1 Before you proceed Take note of the following precautions before you install motherboard components or change any motherboard settings. ⢠Unplug the power cord from the wall socket before touching any component. ⢠Use a grounded wrist strap or touch a safely grounded object or a metal object, such as the power supply case, before handling components to avoid damaging them due to static electricity. ⢠Hold components by the edges to avoid touching the ICs on them. ⢠Whenever you uninstall any component, place it on a grounded antistatic pad or in the bag that came with the component. ⢠Before you install or remove any component, ensure that the power supply is switched off or the power cord is detached from the power supply. Failure to do so may cause severe damage to the motherboard, peripherals, and/or components. P5MT-MT/C Onboard LED SB_PWR1 OFF Powered Off ON Standby Power ® P5MT-MX/C
2 - 2 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2.2 Motherboard overview Before you install the motherboard, study the conï¬guration of your chassis to ensure that the motherboard ï¬ts into it. Refer to the chassis documentation before installing the motherboard. 2 . 2 . 1 P l a c e m e n t d i r e c t i o n When installing the motherboard, make sure that you place it into the chassis in the correct orientation. The edge with external ports goes to the rear part of the chassis as indicated in the image below. 2 . 2 . 2 S c r e w h o l e s Place eight (8) screws into the holes indicated by circles to secure the motherboard to the chassis. Do not overtighten the screws! Doing so can damage the motherboard. Make sure to unplug the chassis power cord before installing or removing the motherboard. Failure to do so can cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components. P l a c e t h i s s i d e t o w a r d s t h e r e a r o f t h e c h a s s i s ® P5MT-MX/C
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 3 2 . 2 . 3 M o t h e r b o a r d l a y o u t 24.5cm (9.6in) 24.5cm (9.6in) DDR2 DIMM_B1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A2 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B2 (64 bit,240-pin module) Intel E7230 Intel ICH7R PCIE1 PCI1 PCIE2 PCI2 ATI RageXL 8Mb FWH SUPER I/O Broadcd BCM5753 SB_PWR1 CR2032 3 Lithium Cell CMOS Powe ATX12V1 BUZZ1 KBPWR CPU_FAN2 CPU_FAN1 FM_CPU2 FM_CPU1 PRI_IDE1 FLOPPY1 ATXPWR1 SATA4 SATA3 SATA1 SATA2 FRNT_FAN1 FRNT_FAN2 USB56 USB34 HDLED1 BPSMB1 TRPWR1 USBPW34 USBPW56 USBPW78 RECOVERY1 RAID_SEL1 VGA_EN1 LAN_EN1 USBPW12 CLRTC1 CHASSIS1 J1 COM2 PANEL1 REAR_FAN1 REAR_FAN2 PS/2KBMS T : M o u se B: Keyboard USB12 COM1 P ARALLEL PORT VGA1 LAN1 ® P5MT-MX/C LGA775 USB78
2 - 4 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2 . 2 . 4 L a y o u t c o n t e n t s S o c k e t s / S l o t s P a g e 1. CPU socket 2-6 2. DDR2 DIMM sockets 2-13 3. PCI Express/PCI slots 2-18 J u m p e r s P a g e 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC1) 2-19 2. CPU fan pin selection (3-pin FM_CPU1, FM_CPU2) 2-20 3. USB device wake-up (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34, USBPW56, 2-20 USBPW78) 4. Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) 2-21 5. Gigabit LAN controller setting (3-pin LAN_EN1) 2-21 6. VGA graphics controller setting (3-pin VGA_EN1) 2-22 7. RAID select (3-pin RAID_SEL1) 2-22 8. BIOS recovery (3-pin RECOVERY1) 2-23 R e a r p a n e l c o n n e c t o r s P a g e 1. PS/2 mouse port (green) 2-24 2. Parallel port 2-24 3. PS/2 keyboard port (purple) 2-24 4. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2 2-24 5. Serial (COM1) port 2-24 6. VGA port 2-24 7. LAN (RJ-45) port 2-24
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 5 I n t e r n a l c o n n e c t o r s P a g e 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY1) 2-25 2. Hard disk activity LED connector (4-pin HDLED1) 2-25 3. IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1)) 2-26 4. Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) 2-27 5. CPU and system fan connectors (4-pin CPU_FAN1/CPU_FAN2, 3-pin REAR_FAN1/REAR_FAN2, FRNT_FAN1/FRNT_FAN2) 2-28 6. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM2) 2-28 7. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB34, USB56, USB78) 2-29 8. Backplane SMBus connector (6-1 pin BPSMB1) 2-29 9. SSI p owe r co nnec to rs (24-pin ATXPWR1, 4-pin ATX12V1) 2-30 10. Ambient thermal sensor connector (2-pin TRPWR1) 2-30 11. System panel connector (20-pin PANEL1) 2-31 ⢠System power LED (Green 3-pin POWERLED) ⢠Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin HDLED) ⢠System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPKROUT) ⢠ATX power button/soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin POWERBTN) ⢠Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESETBTN)
2 - 6 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2 . 3 . 1 I n s t a l l i n g t h e C P U To install a CPU: 1. Locate the CPU socket on the motherboard. 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) The motherboard comes with a surface mount LGA775 socket designed for the Intel ® Pentium ® 4 processor in the 775-land package. Before installing the CPU, make sure that the socket box is facing towards you and the load lever is on your left. ⢠Your boxed Intel ® Pentium ® 4 LGA775 processor package should come with installation instructions for the CPU and heatsink. If the instructions in this section do not match the CPU documentation, follow the latter. ⢠Upon purchase of the motherboard, make sure that the PnP cap is on the socket and the socket contacts are not bent. Contact your retailer immediately if the PnP cap is missing, or if you see any damage to the PnP cap/socket contacts/motherboard components. ASUS will shoulder the cost of repair only if the damage is shipment/ transit-related. ⢠Keep the cap after installing the motherboard. ASUS will process Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) requests only if the motherboard comes with the cap on the LGA775 socket. ⢠The product warranty does not cover damage to the socket contacts resulting from incorrect CPU installation/removal, or misplacement/loss/incorrect removal of the PnP cap. P5MT-MT/C CPU Socket 775 ® P5MT-MX/C
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 7 3. Lift the load lever in the direction of the arrow to a 135º angle. 4. Lift the load plate with your thumb and foreï¬nger to a 100º angle (A), then push the PnP cap from the load plate window to remove (B). To prevent damage to the socket pins, do not remove the PnP cap unless you are installing a CPU. 5. Position the CPU over the socket, making sure that the gold triangle is on the bottom-left corner of the socket. The socket alignment key should ï¬t into the CPU notch. A l i g n m e n t k e y G o l d t r i a n g l e m a r k L o a d p l a t e A B 2. Press the load lever with your thumb (A), then move it to the left (B) until it is released from the retention tab. R e t e n t i o n t a b L o a d l e v e r T h i s s i d e o f t h e s o c k e t b o x s h o u l d f a c e y o u . P n P c a p A B
2 - 8 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n ⢠This motherboard supports Intel ® Pentium ® 4 CPUs in the 775-land package with Hyper-Threading Technology. ⢠Hyper-Threading Technology is supported under Windows ® 2000 Server and Linux 2.4.x (kernel) and later versions only. Under Linux, use the Hyper-Threading compiler to compile the code. If you are using any other operating systems, disable the Hyper-Threading Technology item in the BIOS to ensure system stability and performance. ⢠We recommend that you install Wi nd ow s ® 2000 Server or later version. ⢠Make sure to enable the Hyper-Threading Technology item in BIOS before installing a supported operating system. ⢠For more information on Hyper-Threading Technology, visit www. intel.com/info/hyperthreading. To use the Hyper-Threading Technology on this motherboard: 1. Install an Intel ® Pentium ® 4 CPU that supports Hyper-Threading Technology. 2. Power up the system and enter the BIOS Setup (see Chapter 4: BIOS setup). Under the Advanced Menu, make sure that the item Hyper-Threading Technology is set to Enabled. The item appears only if you installed a CPU that supports Hyper-Threading Technology. 3. Reboot the computer. The CPU ï¬ts in only one correct orientation. DO NOT force the CPU into the socket to prevent bending the connectors on the socket and damaging the CPU! 6. Close the load plate (A), then push the load lever (B) until it snaps into the retention tab. A B N o t e s o n I n t e l ® H y p e r - T h r e a d i n g T e c h n o l o g y
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 9 F a s t e n e r M o t h e r b o a r d h o l e 2 . 3 . 2 I n s t a l l i n g t h e C P U h e a t s i n k a n d f a n The Intel ® Pentium ® 4 LGA775 processor requires a specially designed heatsink and fan assembly to ensure optimum thermal condition and performance. Make sure to orient each fastener with the narrow end of the groove pointing outward. (The photo shows the groove shaded for emphasis.) To install the CPU heatsink and fan: 1. Place the heatsink on top of the installed CPU, making sure that the four fasteners match the holes on the motherboard. N a r r o w e n d o f t h e g r o o v e Orient the heatsink and fan assembly such that the CPU fan cable is closest to the CPU fan connector. ⢠When you buy a boxed Intel ® Pentium ® 4 processor, the package includes the CPU fan and heatsink assembly. ⢠Your Intel ® Pentium ® 4 LGA775 heatsink and fan assembly comes in a push-pin design and requires no tool to install. ⢠If you purchased a separate CPU heatsink and fan assembly, make sure that you have properly applied Thermal Interface Material to the CPU heatsink or CPU before you install the heatsink and fan assembly. ⢠We recommend that you use Intel ® boxed multi-directional heatsink and fan only. ⢠Make sure that you have installed the motherboard to the chassis before you install the CPU fan and heatsink assembly.
2 - 1 0 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 3. Connect the CPU fan cable to the connector on the motherboard labeled CPU_FAN1/CPU_FAN2. ⢠Do not forget to connect the CPU fan connector! Hardware monitoring errors can occur if you fail to plug this connector. ⢠If there is only one CPU fan cable, connect it to the connector labeled CPU_FAN1. Failure to do so may cause hardware monitoring errors. 2. Push down two fasteners at a time in a diagonal sequence to secure the heatsink and fan assembly in place. B B A A A A B B P5M T-MX /C CP U Fa n Co nnec tors GND F ANP WR2 F A NOUT4 G ND F ANPWR 3 F ANO UT7 CP U_F A N1 CPU _F AN 2 ® P 5MT-M X/C
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 1 1 2 . 3 . 3 U n i n s t a l l i n g t h e C P U h e a t s i n k a n d f a n To uninstall the CPU heatsink and fan: 1. Disconnect the CPU fan cable from the connector on the motherboard. 2. Rotate each fastener counterclockwise. 3. Pull up two fasteners at a time in a diagonal sequence to disengage the heatsink and fan assembly from the motherboard. B B A A A A B B
2 - 1 2 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 4. Carefully remove the heatsink and fan assembly from the motherboard. 5. Rotate each fastener clockwise to ensure correct orientation when reinstalling. The narrow end of the groove should point outward after resetting. (The photo shows the groove shaded for emphasis.) N a r r o w e n d o f t h e g r o o v e
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 1 3 2.4 System memory 2 . 4 . 1 O v e r v i e w The motherboard comes with four Double Data Rate 2 (DDR2) Dual Inline Memory Modules (DIMM) sockets. A DDR2 module has the same physical dimensions as a DDR DIMM but has a 240-pin footprint compared to the 184-pin DDR DIMM. DDR2 DIMMs are notched to match the break on the socket and ensure correct installation. The ï¬gure illustrates the location of the DDR2 DIMM sockets: 2 . 4 . 2 M e m o r y c o n f i g u r a t i o n s You may install 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB and 2 GB unbuffered ECC/non-ECC DDR2 533/667 MHz DIMMs into the DIMM sockets. P5MT-MX/C 240-pin DDR2 DIMM Sockets DIMM_A2 DIMM_B1 DIMM_B2 DIMM_A1 1 12 Pins 128 Pins ® P5MT-MX/C ⢠Always install DIMMs with the same CAS latency. For optimum compatibility, it is recommended that you obtain memory modules from the same vendor. Refer to the DDR2 Qualiï¬ed Vendors List at the ASUS web site. ⢠When installing one or two DIMMs, install the DIMM(s) to the blue slots (DIMM_A2/DIMM_B2). ⢠Three DDR2 DIMMs intalled into any three memory sockets will function in single-channel mode.
2 - 1 4 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n R e c o m m e n d e d m e m o r y c o n f i g u r a t i o n s * U s e o n l y i d e n t i c a l D D R 2 D I M M p a i r s . S o c k e t s M o d e D I M M _ A 1 D I M M _ A 2 D I M M _ B 1 D I M M _ B 2 ( b l u e ) ( b l a c k ) ( b l u e ) ( b l a c k ) Single-channel (1) Installed â â â Dual-channel* (1) Installed â Installed â (2) Installed Installed Installed Installed M i c r o s o f t ® O S m e m o r y s u p p o r t Refer to the table below for the maximum memory support information on various Microsoft ® operating systems. M i c r o s o f t ® o p e r a t i n g s y s t e m M a x i m u m p h y s i c a l m e m o r y s u p p o r t e d Windows ® 2000 Professional 4 GB Windows ® 2000 Server 4 GB Windows ® 2000 Advanced Server 8 GB Windows ® 2000 Datacenter Server 32 GB Windows ® Server 2003 Web Edition 2 GB Windows ® Server 2003 Standard Edition 4 GB Windows ® Server 2003 Enterprise Edition 32 GB Windows ® Server 2003 Datacenter Edition 64 GB Windows ® Server 2003 Enterprise 64-bit Edition 32 GB Windows ® Server 2003 Datacenter 64-bit Edition 1 TB The memory support information was gathered from various public Microsoft ® web pages.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 1 5 2 . 4 . 3 I n s t a l l i n g a D I M M To install a DIMM: 1. Unlock a DIMM socket by pressing the retaining clips outward. 2. Align a DIMM on the socket such that the notch on the DIMM matches the break on the socket. 3. Firmly insert the DIMM into the socket until the retaining clips snap back in place and the DIMM is properly seated. ⢠A DDR2 DIMM is keyed with a notch so that it ï¬ts in only one direction. Do not force a DIMM into a socket to avoid damaging the DIMM. ⢠The DDR2 DIMM sockets do not support DDR DIMMs. DO not install DDR DIMMs to the DDR2 DIMM sockets. Unplug the power supply before adding or removing DIMMs or other system components. Failure to do so can cause severe damage to both the motherboard and the components. 2 U n l o c k e d r e t a i n i n g c l i p D D R 2 D I M M n o t c h 1 3 2 . 4 . 4 R e m o v i n g a D I M M Follow these steps to remove a DIMM. 1. Simultaneously press the retaining clips outward to unlock the DIMM. 2. Remove the DIMM from the socket. Support the DIMM lightly with your ï¬ngers when pressing the retaining clips. The DIMM might get damaged when it ï¬ips out with extra force. D D R 2 D I M M n o t c h 1 2 1
2 - 1 6 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2.5 Expansion slots In the future, you may need to install expansion cards. The following sub-sections describe the slots and the expansion cards that they support. 2 . 5 . 1 I n s t a l l i n g a n e x p a n s i o n c a r d To install an expansion card: 1. Before installing the expansion card, read the documentation that came with it and make the necessary hardware settings for the card. 2. Remove the system unit cover (if your motherboard is already installed in a chassis). 3. Remove the bracket opposite the slot that you intend to use. Keep the screw for later use. 4. Align the card connector with the slot and press ï¬rmly until the card is completely seated on the slot. 5. Secure the card to the chassis with the screw you removed earlier. 6. Replace the system cover. 2 . 5 . 2 C o n f i g u r i n g a n e x p a n s i o n c a r d After installing the expansion card, conï¬gure the it by adjusting the software settings. 1. Turn on the system and change the necessary BIOS settings, if any. See Chapter 4 for information on BIOS setup. 2. Assign an IRQ to the card. Refer to the tables on the next page. 3. Install the software drivers for the expansion card. Make sure to unplug the power cord before adding or removing expansion cards. Failure to do so may cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components. When using PCI cards on shared slots, ensure that the drivers support âShare IRQâ or that the cards do not need IRQ assignments. Otherwise, conï¬icts will arise between the two PCI groups, making the system unstable and the card inoperable.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 1 7 2 . 5 . 3 I n t e r r u p t a s s i g n m e n t s I R Q P r i o r i t y S t a n d a r d F u n c t i o n 0 1 System Timer 1 2 Keyboard Controller 2 â Re-direct to IRQ #9 3 11 Communications Port (COM2)* 4 12 Communications Port (COM1)* 5 13 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 6 14 Floppy Disk Controller 7 15 Printer Port (LPT1)* 8 3 System CMOS/Real Time Clock 9 4 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 10 5 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 11 6 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 12 7 PS/2 Compatible Mouse Port* 13 8 Numeric Data Processor 14 9 Primary IDE Channel 15 10 Secondary IDE Channel * T h e s e I R Q s a r e u s u a l l y a v a i l a b l e f o r I S A o r P C I d e v i c e s . D e s c r i p t i o n I N T A I N T B I N T C I N T D R E Q # G N T # PCI slot 1 PIRQE# PIRQF# PIRQG# PIRQH# REQ0# GNT0# PCI slot 2 PIRQG# PIRQH# PIRQE# PIRQF# REQ1# GNT1# PCI E x16 slot PIRQA# PIRQB# PIRQC# PIRQD# PCI E x 8 slot PIRQA# PIRQB# PIRQC# PIRQD# Onboard USB controller 0 PIRQA# Onboard USB controller 1 PIRQB# Onboard USB controller 2 PIRQC# Onboard USB controller 3 PIRQD# USB 2.0 EHCI co n t ro l l er PIRQA# Onboard IDE port PIRQC# Onboard SATA port PIRQD# Onboard Graphics Controller PIRQE# REQ2# GNT2# SMBus Controller PIRQD# Onboard LAN PIRQB# When using PCI cards on shared slots, ensure that the drivers support âShare IRQâ or that the cards do not need IRQ assignments; otherwise, conï¬icts will arise between the two PCI groups, making the system unstable and the card inoperable. S t a n d a r d i n t e r r u p t a s s i g n m e n t s P C I B u s N u m b e r , I D S E L , a n d I R Q a s s i g n m e n t s
2 - 1 8 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2 . 5 . 6 P C I s l o t s The PCI slots support cards such as a LAN card, SCSI card, USB card, and other cards that comply with PCI 2.3 speciï¬cations. The ï¬gure shows a LAN card installed on a 32-bit PCI slot. 2 . 5 . 5 P C I E x p r e s s x 8 s l o t This motherboard supports PCI Express x8 network cards, SCSI cards, and other cards that comply with PCI Express 1.0a speciï¬cations. P C I E x p r e s s x 8 s l o t 2 . 5 . 4 P C I E x p r e s s x 1 6 s l o t This motherboard supports PCI Express x16 graphics cards that comply with the PCI Express speciï¬cations. The following ï¬gure shows a graphics card installed on the PCI Express x16 slot. A PCI Express graphics card may run only at x1 speed due to chipset limitation.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 1 9 1 . C l e a r R T C R A M ( C L R T C 1 ) This jumper allows you to clear the Real Time Clock (RTC) RAM in CMOS. You can clear the CMOS memory of system setup parameters by erasing the CMOS RTC RAM data. The onboard button cell battery powers the RAM data in CMOS, which include system setup information such as system passwords. To erase the RTC RAM: 1. Turn OFF the computer and unplug the power cord. 2. Remove the onboard battery. 3. Move the jumper cap from pins 1-2 (default) to pins 2-3. Keep the cap on pins 2-3 for about 5~10 seconds, then move the cap back to pins 1-2. 4. Re-install the battery. 5. Plug the power cord and turn ON the computer. 6. Hold down the <Del> key during the boot process and enter BIOS setup to re-enter data. Except when clearing the RTC RAM, never remove the cap on CLRTC jumper default position. Removing the cap will cause system boot failure! 2.6 Jumpers P5MT-MX/C Clear RTC RAM CLRTC1 Normal (Default) Clear CMOS 2 1 3 2 ® P5MT-MX/C
2 - 2 0 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 3 . U S B d e v i c e w a k e - u p ( 3 - p i n U S B P W 1 2 , U S B P W 3 4 , U S B P W 5 6 , U S B P W 7 8 ) Set these jumpers to 5V to wake up the computer from S1 sleep mode (CPU stopped, DRAM refreshed, system running in low power mode) using the connected USB devices. Set to 5VSB to wake up from S4 sleep mode (no power to CPU and DRAM, power supply in reduced power mode). ⢠The USB device wake-up feature requires a power supply that can provide 500mA on the 5VSB lead for each USB port; otherwise, the system would not power up. ⢠The total current consumed must NOT exceed the power supply capability ( 5VSB) whether under normal condition or in sleep mode. 2 . C P U f a n p i n s e l e c t i o n ( 3 - p i n F M _ C P U 1 , F M _ C P U 2 ) These jumpers allow you to connect either a 3-pin or a 4-pin fan cable plug to the CPU fan connectors (CPU_FAN1, CPU_FAN2). Set these jumpers to pins 1-2 if you are using a 3-pin fan cable plug, or to pins 2-3 if you are using a 4-pin plug. ® P5MT-MX/C P5MT-MX/C USB Device Wake-Up USBPW12 (Default) 5V 5VSB 3 2 2 1 USBPW78 (Default) 5V 5VSB 3 2 2 1 USBPW56 (Default) 5V 5VSB 2 1 3 2 USBPW34 (Default) 5V 5VSB 2 1 3 2 P5MT-MX/C FM CPU Setting FM_CPU1 FM_CPU2 2 1 3 2 3-pin fan 4-pin fan (Default) 2 3 2 1 3-pin fan 4-pin fan (Default) ® P5MT-MX/C
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 2 1 4 . K e y b o a r d p o w e r ( 3 - p i n K B P W R 1 ) Thi s ju mpe r a llo ws y ou to enab le or dis able th e k eybo ard wa ke- up fea ture . S et thi s ju mpe r t o pi ns 2-3 ( 5VS B) t o w ake up the co mpu ter whe n yo u p res s a key on th e ke ybo ard (th e d efa ult is the Sp ace Bar ). Thi s fe atu re req uire s a n A TX p owe r s upp ly t hat ca n su ppl y a t l east 1A on the 5V SB lea d, a nd a c orr espo ndi ng sett ing in the BI OS. 5 . G i g a b i t L A N c o n t r o l l e r s e t t i n g ( 3 - p i n L A N _ E N 1 ) This jumper allows you to enable or disable the onboard Broadcom BCM5753 Gigabit LAN controller. Set to pins 1-2 to activate the Gigabit LAN feature. ® P5MT-MX/C P5MT-MX/C Keyboard Power Setting KBPWR1 (Default) 5V 5VSB 2 3 1 2 P5MT-MX/C LAN_EN1 Setting Enable (Default) Disable LAN_EN1 2 1 2 3 ® P5MT-MX/C
2 - 2 2 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 6 . V G A g r a p h i c s c o n t r o l l e r s e t t i n g ( 3 - p i n V G A _ E N 1 ) This jumper allows you to enable or disable the onboard ATI Rage XL video graphics controller. Set to pins 1-2 to enable the video graphics controller. Make sure to set this jumper to Disable if you want to install VGA cards on the PCI and PCI Express slots. P5MT-MX/C VGA Setting VGA_EN1 Enable (Default) Disable 2 1 2 3 ® P5MT-MX/C 7 . R A I D s e l e c t s e t t i n g ( 3 - p i n R A I D _ S E L 1 ) Set this jumper to 1-2 (Default) to enable LSI RAID ROM. Set this jumper to 2-3 to enable Intel ® RAID ROM. RAID_SEL1 LSI RAID ROM (Default) INTEL RAID ROM 2 1 2 3 P5MT-MX/C RAID_SEL1 Setting ® P5MT-MX/C
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 2 3 8 . B I O S r e c o v e r y ( 3 - p i n R E C O V E R Y 1 ) This jumper allows you to recover your original BIOS from a ï¬oppy disk in case the BIOS codes and data get corrupted. To recover the BIOS: 1. Turn OFF your computer and unplug the power cord. 2. Move the jumper cap from pins 1-2 (default) to pins 2-3. 3. Insert a ï¬oppy disk with the original or updated BIOS ï¬ le. 4. Plug the power cord and turn ON the computer. 5. The system searches for the BIOS ï¬ le in the ï¬oppy then reï¬ashes the BIOS. 6. When ï¬nished, shut down your computer. 7. Replace the jumper cap from pins 2-3 to pins 1-2. 8. Reboot your computer. 9. Hold down the <Del> key during the boot process and enter BIOS setup to re-enter data. ® P5MT-MX/C P5MT-MX/C BIOS Recovery Setting RECOVERY1 (Default) Normal BIOS recovery 2 3 2 1
2 - 2 4 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 2.7 Connectors 2 . 7 . 1 R e a r p a n e l c o n n e c t o r s 1. PS/2 mouse port (green). This port is for a PS/2 mouse. 2. Parallel port. This 25-pin port connects a parallel printer, a scanner, or other devices. 3. PS/2 keyboard port (purple). This port is for a PS/2 keyboard. 4. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. These two 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. 5. Serial (COM1) port. This 9-pin communication port is for pointing devices or other serial devices. 6. Video Graphics Adapter (VGA) port. This port is for a VGA monitor or other VGA-compatible devices. 7. LAN (RJ-45) port. This port allows Gigabit connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) through a network hub. Refer to the table below for the LAN port LED indications. 1 3 6 5 7 4 2 A C T / L I N K L E D S P E E D L E D S t a t u s D e s c r i p t i o n S t a t u s D e s c r i p t i o n OFF No link OFF 10 Mbps connection GREEN Linked RED 100 Mbps connection BLINKING Data activity GREEN 1 Gbps connection L A N p o r t L E D i n d i c a t i o n s L A N p o r t S P E E D L E D A C T / L I N K L E D
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 2 5 2 . 7 . 2 I n t e r n a l c o n n e c t o r s 1 . F l o p p y d i s k d r i v e c o n n e c t o r ( 3 4 - 1 p i n F L O P P Y 1 ) This connector is for the provided ï¬oppy disk drive (FDD) signal cable. Insert one end of the cable to this connector, then connect the other end to the signal connector at the back of the ï¬oppy disk drive. Pin 5 on the connector is removed to prevent incorrect cable connection when using a FDD cable with a covered Pin 5. 2 . H a r d d i s k a c t i v i t y L E D c o n n e c t o r ( 4 - p i n H D L E D 1 ) This connector supplies power to the hard disk activity LED for add-on cards such as SCSI or RAID cards. The read/write activities of the add-on cards cause the hard disk activity LED to light up. NOTE: Ori ent the red markings on the floppy ribbon cable to PIN 1. P5MT-MX/C Floppy Disk Drive Connector FLOPPY1 PIN 1 ® P5MT-MX/C P5MT-MX/C SCSI/SA T A Card Activity LED Connector HDLED1 1 ADD_IN_CARD_ACT# NC ADD_IN_CARD_ACT# NC ® P5MT-MX/C
2 - 2 6 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 3 . I D E c o n n e c t o r ( 4 0 - 1 p i n P R I _ I D E 1 ) This connector is for an Ultra DMA 100/66 signal cable. The Ultra DMA 100/66 signal cable has one connector: a blue connector for the primary IDE connector on the motherboard, a black connector for an Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE slave device (optical drive/hard disk drive), and a gray connector for an Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE master device (hard disk drive). If you install two hard disk drives, you must conï¬gure the second drive as a slave device by setting its jumper accordingly. Refer to the hard disk documentation for the jumper settings. ⢠Pin 20 on the IDE connector is removed to match the covered hole on the Ultra DMA cable connector. This prevents incorrect insertion when you connect the IDE cable. ⢠Use the 80-conductor IDE cable for Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE devices. P5MT-MX/C IDE Connector NOTE: Orient the red markings (usually zigzag) on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. PRI_IDE1 PI N 1 ® P5MT-MX/C
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 2 7 4 . S e r i a l A T A c o n n e c t o r s ( 7 - p i n S A T A 1 , S A T A 2 , S A T A 3 , S A T A 4 ) These connectors are for the Serial ATA signal cables for Serial ATA hard disk drives. If you installed Serial ATA hard disk drives, you can create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, or RAID 10 conï¬guration with the onboard Intel ® ICH7R RAID controller. Thes e c onne ctor s a re s et t o St anda rd I DE mode by def ault . In Sta ndar d IDE mode, you can connect Serial ATA boot/data hard disk drives to these connectors. If you intend to create a Serial ATA RAID set using these connectors, set the Conï¬ gure SAT A a s item in the BIOS to [RAID]. See section â4.3.5 IDE Conï¬gurationâ for details. When using the connectors in Standard IDE mode, connect the primary (boot) hard disk drive to the SATA1 or SATA2 connector. Refer to the table below for the recommended SATA hard disk drive connections. P5MT-MX/C SA T A Connectors SA T A 1 GN D RS A TA _T XP 3 RS A TA _T XN 3 GN D RS A TA _R XP 3 RS A TA _R XN 3 GN D GN D RS A TA _T XP 3 RS A TA _T XN 3 GN D RS A TA _R XP 3 RS A TA _R XN 3 GN D GN D RS A TA _T XP 3 RS A TA _T XN 3 GN D RS A TA _R XP 3 RS A TA _R XN 3 GN D GN D RS A TA _T XP 3 RS A TA _T XN 3 GN D RS A TA _R XP 3 RS A TA _R XN 3 GN D SATA2 SATA3 SATA4 ® P5MT-MX/C S e r i a l A T A h a r d d i s k d r i v e c o n n e c t i o n C o n n e c t o r S e t t i n g U s e SATA1/SATA2 Master Boot disk SATA3/SATA4 Slave Data disk
2 - 2 8 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 6 . S e r i a l p o r t c o n n e c t o r ( 1 0 - 1 p i n C O M 2 ) This connector is for a serial (COM2) port. Connect the serial port module cable to this connector, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. 5 . C P U a n d s y s t e m f a n c o n n e c t o r s ( 4 - p i n C P U _ F A N 1 / 2 , 3 - p i n R E A R _ F A N 1 / 2 , 3 - p i n F R N T _ F A N 1 / 2 ) The fan co nne ctor s s upp ort coo lin g f ans of 350 mA ~ 740 mA (8.88 W max.) or a total of 2.1 A ~ 4.44 A (53.28 W max.) at 12V. Connect the fan cables to the fan connectors on the motherboard, making sure that the black wire of each cable matches the ground pin of the connector. Do not forget to connect the fan cables to the fan connectors. Insufï¬cient air ï¬ow inside the system may damage the motherboard components. These are not jumpers! Do not place jumper caps on the fan connectors! ® P5MT-MX/C P5MT-MX/C Fan Connectors REAR_F AN2 REAR_F AN1 FRNT_F AN1 FRNT_FAN2 GND F ANPWR3 F ANOUT7 GND F ANPWR2 F ANOUT4 CPU_F AN2 CPU_F AN1 GND Rotation 12V GND Rotation 12V GND Rotation 12V GND Rotation 12V CPU_FAN1 CPU_FAN2 REAR_FAN1 REAR_FAN2 FRNT_FAN1 FRNT_FAN2 P5MT-MX/C Serial Port (COM2) Connector PIN 1 COM2 ® P5MT-MX/C
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 2 9 7 . U S B c o n n e c t o r s ( 1 0 - 1 p i n U S B 3 4 , U S B 5 6 , U S B 7 8 ) These connectors are for USB 2.0 ports. Connect the USB module cable to this connector, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. The USB connectors comply with USB 2.0 speciï¬cation that supports up to 480 Mbps connection speed. Never connect a 1394 cable to the USB connectors. Doing so will damage the motherboard! ® P5MT-MX/C USB 5V USB 5V USB_P4- USB_P5- USB_P4 USB_P5 GND GND NC P5MT-MX/C USB 2.0 Connectors USB34 USB 5V USB 5V USB_P3- USB_P2- USB_P3 USB_P2 GND GND NC USB56 USB 5V USB_P7- USB_P7 GND NC USB78 USB 5V USB_P6- USB_P6 GND 8 . B a c k p l a n e S M B u s c o n n e c t o r ( 6 - 1 p i n B P S M B 1 ) This connector allows you to connect SMBus (System Management Bus) devices. Devices communicate with an SMBus host and/or other SMBus devices using the SMBus interface. P5MT-MX/C SMBus Connector BPSMB1 1 I2C_CLK GND I2C_DA T A 5V F ANOUT ® P5MT-MX/C
2 - 3 0 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n 9 . S S I p o w e r c o n n e c t o r s ( 2 4 - p i n A T X P W R 1 , 4 - p i n A T X 1 2 V 1 ) These connectors are for SSI power supply plugs. The power supply plugs are designed to ï¬t these connectors in only one orientation. Find the proper orientation and push down ï¬rmly until the connectors completely ï¬t. ⢠Use of an SSI 12 V Speciï¬cation 2.0-compliant power supply unit (PSU) that provides a minimum power of 450 W is recommended for a fully-conï¬gured system. ⢠Do not forget to connect the 4-p in ATX12V1 power plug; otherwise, the system will not boot up. ⢠Use of a PSU with a higher power output is recommended when conï¬guring a system with more power consuming devices. The system may become unstable or may not boot up if the power is inadequate. ⢠You must install a PSU with a higher power rating if you intend to install additional devices. P5MT-MX/C ATX Power Connectors 24-pin Power Connector A TXPWR1 3 V olts 3 V olts Ground 5 V olts 5 V olts Ground Ground Power OK 5V Standby 12 V olts -5 V olts 5 V olts 3 V olts -12 V olts Ground Ground Ground PSON# Ground 5 V olts 12 V olts 3 V olts 5 V olts 1 Ground A TX12V1 12V DC GND 12V DC GND ® P5MT-MX/C 1 0 . A m b i e n t t h e r m a l s e n s o r c o n n e c t o r ( 2 - p i n T R P W R 1 ) If you want additional thermal monitoring, connect the thermal sensor cable with a thermistor (of 1ºK or at 25ºC, B=3435) to this connector. P5MT-MX/C TRPWR Connector TRPWR1 SYS-THEAMAL2 GND ® P5MT-MX/C
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 2 - 3 1 ⢠System power LED (Green 3-pin POWERLED) This 3-pin connector is for the system power LED. Connect the chassis power LED cable to this connector. The system power LED lights up when you turn on the system power, and blinks when the system is in sleep mode. ⢠Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin HDLED) This 2-pin connector is for the HDD Activity LED. Connect the HDD Activity LED cable to this connector. The IDE LED lights up or ï¬ashes when data is read from or written to the HDD. ⢠System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPKROUT) This 4-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted system warning speaker. The speaker allows you to hear system beeps and warnings. ⢠ATX power button/soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin POWERBTN) This connector is for the system power button. Pressing the power button turns the system on or puts the system in sleep or soft-off mode depending on the BIOS settings. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds while the system is ON turns the system OFF. ⢠Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESETBTN) This 2-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted reset button for system reboot without turning off the system power. 1 1 . S y s t e m p a n e l c o n n e c t o r ( 2 0 - p i n P A N E L 1 ) This connector supports several chassis-mounted functions. The sytem panel connector is color-coded for easy connection. ® P5MT-MX/C P5MT-MX/C System Panel Connector P ANEL1 3VSB GND POWERBTN# 5V GND GND NC HDLED MLED NMIBTN# GND RESETBTN# SPEAKER GND FP_ GND NC PLED FP_ FP_ FP_ NC 5V
2 - 3 2 C h a p t e r 2 : H a r d w a r e i n f o r m a t i o n
3 Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence, the vocal POST messages, and ways of shutting down the system.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C Chapter summary 3 3.1 Starting up for the ï¬rst time ................................................ 3-1 3.2 Powering off the computer ................................................... 3-2
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 3 - 1 3.1 Starting up for the ï¬rst time 1. After making all the connections, replace the system case cover. 2. Be sure that all switches are off. 3. Connect the power cord to the power connector at the back of the system chassis. 4. Connect the power cord to a power outlet that is equipped with a surge protector. 5. Turn on the devices in the following order: a. Monitor b. External SCSI devices (starting with the last device on the chain) c. System power 6. After applying power, the system power LED on the system front panel case lights up. For systems with ATX power supplies, the system LED lights up when you press the ATX power button. If your monitor complies with âgreenâ standards or if it has a âpower standbyâ feature, the monitor LED may light up or switch between orange and green after the system LED turns on. The system then runs the Power-On Self-Test (POST). While the tests are running, the BIOS beeps or additional messages appear on the screen. If you do not see anything within 30 seconds from the time you turned on the power, the system may have failed a power-on test. Check the jumper settings and connections or call your retailer for assistance. 7. At power on, hold down the <Del> key to enter the BIOS Setup. Follow the instructions in Chapter 4. A M I B I O S b e e p c o d e s B e e p D e s c r i p t i o n E r r o r One beep Keyboard controller error Refresh Time error No master drive detected Two continuous beeps followed by Floppy controller failure two short beeps Two continuous beeps followed by Hardware component failure four short beeps
3 - 2 C h a p t e r 3 : P o w e r i n g u p 3.2 Powering off the computer 3 . 2 . 1 U s i n g t h e O S s h u t d o w n f u n c t i o n If you are using Windows ® Server 2000: 1. Click the Start button then click Shut Down... 2. Make sure that the Shut Down option button is selected, then click the OK button to shut down the computer. 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows ® shuts down. If you are using Windows ® Server 2003: 1. Click the Start button then select Turn Off Computer. 2. Click the Turn Off button to shut down the computer. 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows ® shuts down. 3 . 2 . 2 U s i n g t h e d u a l f u n c t i o n p o w e r s w i t c h While the system is ON, pressing the power switch for less than four seconds puts the system to sleep mode or to soft-off mode, depending on the BIOS setting. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds lets the system enter the soft-off mode regardless of the BIOS setting. Refer to section â4.5 Power Menuâ in Chapter 4 for details
4 BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change the system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C Chapter summary 4 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ........................................ 4-1 4.2 BIOS setup program ............................................................ 4-10 4.3 Main menu ........................................................................... 4-13 4.4 Advanced menu .................................................................. 4-18 4.5 Power menu ........................................................................ 4-27 4.6 Boot menu .......................................................................... 4-31 4.7 Exit menu ............................................................................ 4-35
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 1 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS The following utilities allow you to manage and update the motherboard Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) setup. 1. ASUS AFUDOS (Updates the BIOS in DOS mode using a bootable ï¬oppy disk.) 2. ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 (Updates the BIOS using a bootable ï¬oppy disk or the motherboard support CD when the BIOS ï¬le fails or gets corrupted.) 3. ASUS Update (Updates the BIOS in Windows ® environment.) Refer to the corresponding sections for details on these utilities. 4 . 1 . 1 C r e a t i n g a b o o t a b l e f l o p p y d i s k 1. Do either one of the following to create a bootable ï¬oppy disk. DOS environment a. Insert a 1.44 MB ï¬oppy disk into the drive. b. At the DOS prompt, type format A:/S then press <Enter>. Windows ® XP environment a. Insert a 1.44 MB ï¬oppy disk to the ï¬oppy disk drive. b. Click Start from the Windows ® desktop, then select My Computer. c. Select the 3 1/2 Floppy Drive icon. d. Click File from the menu, then select Format. A Format 3 1/2 Floppy Disk window appears. e. Windows ® XP users: Select Create an MS-DOS startup disk from the format options ï¬eld, then click Start. 2. Copy the original or the latest motherboard BIOS ï¬le to the bootable ï¬oppy disk. Save a copy of the original motherboard BIOS ï¬le to a bootable ï¬oppy disk in case you need to restore the BIOS in the future. Copy the original motherboard BIOS using the ASUS Update or AFUDOS utilities.
4 - 2 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4 . 1 . 2 A F U D O S u t i l i t y The AFUDOS utility allows you to update the BIOS ï¬le in DOS environment using a bootable ï¬oppy disk with the updated BIOS ï¬le. This utility also allows you to copy the current BIOS ï¬le that you can use as backup when the BIOS fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. C o p y i n g t h e c u r r e n t B I O S To copy the current BIOS ï¬le using the AFUDOS utility: 1. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable ï¬oppy disk you created earlier. 2. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /o[ï¬lename] where the [ï¬lename] is any user-assigned ï¬lename not more than eight alphanumeric characters for the main ï¬lename and three alphanumeric characters for the extension name. ⢠Make sure that the ï¬oppy disk is not write-protected and has at least 1024 KB free space to save the ï¬le. ⢠The succeeding BIOS screens are for reference only. The actual BIOS screen displays may not be same as shown. M a i n f i l e n a m e E x t e n s i o n n a m e A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom The utility returns to the DOS prompt after copying the current BIOS ï¬le. 3. Press <Enter>. The utility copies the current BIOS ï¬le to the ï¬oppy disk. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom AM I F ir mwa re Up da te Uti li ty - Ver si on 1. 19( AS US V2. 07 (03 .1 1.2 4B B)) Cop yrigh t (C ) 2 00 2 A me ric an Me gatre nds, Inc. All rig ht s r es erv ed . Reading ï¬ash ..... done Write to ï¬le...... ok A:\>
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 3 2. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable ï¬oppy disk you created earlier. 3. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /i[ï¬lename] where [ï¬lename] is the latest or the original BIOS ï¬le on the bootable ï¬oppy disk. U p d a t i n g t h e B I O S f i l e To update the BIOS ï¬le using the AFUDOS utility: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) and download the latest BIOS ï¬le for the motherboard. Save the BIOS ï¬le to a bootable ï¬oppy disk. A:\>afudos /iP5MT-MXC.ROM Write the BIOS ï¬lename on a piece of paper. You need to type the exact BIOS ï¬lename at the DOS prompt. A:\>afudos /iP5MT-MXC.ROM AM I F ir mwa re Up da te Uti li ty - Ver si on 1. 19( AS US V2. 07 (03 .1 1.2 4B B)) Cop yrigh t (C ) 2 00 2 A me ric an Me gatre nds, Inc. All rig ht s r es erv ed . WARNING!! Do not turn off power during ï¬ash BIOS Reading ï¬le ....... done Reading ï¬ash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing ï¬ash ...... done Writing ï¬ash ...... 0x0008CC00 (9%) 4. The utility veriï¬es the ï¬le and starts updating the BIOS. Do not shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure!
4 - 4 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 5. The utility returns to the DOS prompt after the BIOS update process is completed. Reboot the system from the hard disk drive. A:\>afudos /iP5MT-MXC.ROM AM I F ir mwa re Up da te Uti li ty - Ver si on 1. 19( AS US V2. 07 (03 .1 1.2 4B B)) Cop yrigh t (C ) 2 00 2 A me ric an Me gatre nds, Inc. All rig ht s r es erv ed . WARNING!! Do not turn off power during ï¬ash BIOS Reading ï¬le ....... done Reading ï¬ash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing ï¬ash ...... done Writing ï¬ash ...... done Verifying ï¬ash .... done Please restart your computer A:\>
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 5 4 . 1 . 3 A S U S C r a s h F r e e B I O S 2 u t i l i t y The ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 is an auto recovery tool that allows you to restore the BIOS ï¬le when it fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. You can update a corrupted BIOS ï¬le using the motherboard support CD or the ï¬oppy disk that contains the updated BIOS ï¬le. R e c o v e r i n g t h e B I O S f r o m a f l o p p y d i s k To recover the BIOS from a ï¬oppy disk: 1. Turn on the system. 2. Insert the ï¬oppy disk with the original or updated BIOS ï¬le to the ï¬oppy disk drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the ï¬oppy disk for the original or updated BIOS ï¬le. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for ï¬oppy... 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for ï¬oppy... Floppy found! Reading ï¬le âP5MT-MXC.ROMâ. Completed. Start ï¬ashing... When found, the utility reads the BIOS ï¬le and starts ï¬ashing the corrupted BIOS ï¬le. DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! ⢠Prepare the motherboard support CD or the ï¬oppy disk containing the updated motherboard BIOS before using this utility. ⢠Make sure that you rename the original or updated BIOS ï¬le in the ï¬oppy disk to P5MT-MXC.ROM.
4 - 6 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p The recovered BIOS may not be the latest BIOS version for this motherboard. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS ï¬le. R e c o v e r i n g t h e B I O S f r o m t h e s u p p o r t C D To recover the BIOS from the support CD: 1. Remove any ï¬oppy disk from the ï¬oppy disk drive, then turn on the system. 2. Insert the support CD to the optical drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the ï¬oppy disk for the original or updated BIOS ï¬le. 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for ï¬oppy... Floppy not found! Checking for CD-ROM... CD-ROM found! Reading ï¬le âP5MT-MXC.ROMâ. Completed. Start ï¬ashing... When no ï¬oppy disk is found, the utility automatically checks the optical drive for the original or updated BIOS ï¬le. The utility then updates the corrupted BIOS ï¬le. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for ï¬oppy...
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 7 4 . 1 . 4 A S U S U p d a t e u t i l i t y The ASUS Update is a utility that allows you to manage, save, and update the motherboard BIOS in Windows ® environment. The ASUS Update utility allows you to: ⢠Save the current BIOS file ⢠Download the latest BIOS file from the Internet ⢠Update the BIOS from an updated BIOS file ⢠Update the BIOS directly from the Internet, and ⢠View the BIOS version information. This utility is available in the support CD that comes with the motherboard package. ASUS Update requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP). I n s t a l l i n g A S U S U p d a t e To install ASUS Update: 1. Place the support CD in the optical drive. The Drivers menu appears. 2. Click the Utilities tab, then click Install ASUS Update VX.XX.XX. 3. The ASUS Update utility is copied to your system. Quit all Windows ® applications before you update the BIOS using this utility.
4 - 8 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 3. Select the ASUS FTP site nearest you to avoid network trafï¬c, or click Auto Select. Click Next. U p d a t i n g t h e B I O S t h r o u g h t h e I n t e r n e t To update the BIOS through the Internet: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows ® desktop by clicking Start > Programs > ASUS > ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate. The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from the Internet option from the drop-down menu, then click Next.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 9 U p d a t i n g t h e B I O S t h r o u g h a B I O S f i l e To update the BIOS through a BIOS ï¬le: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows ® desktop by clicking Start > Programs > ASUS > ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate. The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from a ï¬le option from the drop-down menu, then click Next. 4. From the FTP site, select the BIOS version that you wish to download. Click Next. 5. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process. The ASUS Update utility is capable of updating itself through the Internet. Always update the utility to avail of all its features. 3. Locate the BIOS ï¬le from the Open window, then click Save. 4. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process.
4 - 1 0 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4.2 BIOS setup program This motherboard supports a programmable ï¬rmware chip that you can update using the provided utility described in section â4.1 Managing and updating your BIOSâ. Use the BIOS Setup program when you are installing a motherboard, reconï¬guring your system, or prompted to âRun Setupâ. This section explains how to conï¬gure your system using this utility. Even if you are not prompted to use the Setup program, you can change the conï¬guration of your computer in the future. For example, you can enable the security password feature or change the power management settings. This requires you to reconï¬gure your system using the BIOS Setup program so that the computer can recognize these changes and record them in the CMOS RAM of the ï¬rmware hub. The ï¬rmware hub on the motherboard stores the Setup utility. When you start up the computer, the system provides you with the opportunity to run this program. Press <Del> during the Power-On Self-Test (POST) to enter the Setup utility; otherwise, POST continues with its test routines. If you wish to enter Setup after POST, restart the system by pressing <Ctrl> <Alt> <Del>, or by pressing the reset button on the system chassis. You can also restart by turning the system off and then back on. Do this last option only if the ï¬rst two failed. The Setup program is designed to make it as easy to use as possible. Being a menu-driven program, it lets you scroll through the various sub-menus and make your selections from the available options using the navigation keys. ⢠The default BIOS settings for this motherboard apply for most conditions to ensure optimum performance. If the system becomes unstable after changing any BIOS settings, load the default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability. Select the Load Setup Defaults item under the Exit Menu. See section â4.7 Exit Menu.â ⢠The BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference purposes only, and may not exactly match what you see on your screen. ⢠Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS ï¬le for this motherboard.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 1 1 4 . 2 . 2 M e n u b a r The menu bar on top of the screen has the following main items: Main For changing the basic system conï¬guration Advanced For changing the advanced system settings Power For changing the Advanced Power Management (APM) conï¬guration Boot For changing the system boot conï¬guration Exit For selecting the exit options and loading default settings 4 . 2 . 1 B I O S m e n u s c r e e n To select an item on the menu bar, press the right or left arrow key on the keyboard until the desired item is highlighted. Some of the navigation keys differ from one screen to another. 4 . 2 . 3 N a v i g a t i o n k e y s At the bottom right corner of a menu screen are the navigation keys for that particular menu. Use the navigation keys to select items in the menu and change the settings. System Time [16:37:21] System Date [Wed,06/01/2005] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Primary IDE Master [ST320410A] Primary IDE Slave [ASUS CD-S520/A] Third IDE Master [Not Detected] Third IDE Slave [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Slave [Not Detected] IDE Conï¬guration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a ï¬eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conï¬gure the System time. N a v i g a t i o n k e y s G e n e r a l h e l p M e n u b a r S u b - m e n u i t e m s C o n f i g u r a t i o n f i e l d s M e n u i t e m s
4 - 1 2 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4 . 2 . 4 M e n u i t e m s The highlighted item on the menu bar displays the speciï¬c items for that menu. For example, selecting Main shows the Main menu items. The other items (Advanced, Power, Boot, and Exit) on the menu bar have their respective menu items. 4 . 2 . 5 S u b - m e n u i t e m s A solid triangle before each item on any menu screen means that the item has a sub-menu. To display the sub-menu, select the item and press <Enter>. 4 . 2 . 6 C o n f i g u r a t i o n f i e l d s These ï¬elds show the values for the menu items. If an item is user-conï¬gurable, you can change the value of the ï¬eld opposite the item. You cannot select an item that is not user-conï¬gurable. A conï¬gurable ï¬eld is enclosed in brackets, and is highlighted when selected. To change the value of a ï¬eld, select it then press <Enter> to display a list of options. Refer to â4.2.7 Pop-up window.â 4 . 2 . 7 P o p - u p w i n d o w Select a menu item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up window with the conï¬guration options for that item. 4 . 2 . 8 S c r o l l b a r A scroll bar appears on the right side of a menu screen when there are items that do not ï¬t on the screen. Press the Up/Down arrow keys or <Page Up> /<Page Down> keys to display the other items on the screen. 4 . 2 . 9 G e n e r a l h e l p At the top right corner of the menu screen is a brief description of the selected item. M a i n m e n u i t e m s Sy st em T im e [16:37:21] System Date [Wed, 06/01/2005] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Primary IDE Master :[ST320410A] Primary IDE Slave :[ ASUS CD-S520/A] Th ird I DE M as t er :[ No t Det ec te d] Th ird I DE S la v e :[ No t Det ec te d] Fo urt h ID E Ma s te r :[ No t D et ec ted ] Fo urt h ID E Sl a ve :[ No t D et ect ed ] ID E C on ï¬g ur at i on Sy ste m In fo rm a ti on S c r o l l b a r Advanced PCI/PnP Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. Plug And Play O/S [No] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Palette Snooping [Disabled] PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] P o p - u p w i n d o w
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 1 3 4.3 Main menu When you enter the BIOS Setup program, the Main menu screen appears, giving you an overview of the basic system information. 4 . 3 . 1 S y s t e m T i m e [ x x : x x : x x ] Sets the system time. 4 . 3 . 2 S y s t e m D a t e [ D a y x x / x x / x x x x ] Sets the system date. 4 . 3 . 3 L e g a c y D i s k e t t e A [ 1 . 4 4 M , 3 . 5 i n . ] Sets the type of ï¬oppy drive installed. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [360K, 5.25 in.] [1.2M , 5.25 in.] [720K , 3.5 in.] [1.44M, 3.5 in.] [2.88M, 3.5 in.] Refer to section â4.2.1 BIOS menu screenâ for information on the menu screen items and how to navigate through them. Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a ï¬eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conï¬gure the System time. System Time [16:37:21] System Date [Mon,10/02/2004] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Primary IDE Master : [ST320410A] Primary IDE Slave : [ASUS CD-S520/A] Third IDE Master : [Not Detected] Third IDE Slave : [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master : [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Slave : [Not Detected] IDE Conï¬guration System Information
4 - 1 4 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4 . 3 . 4 P r i m a r y , T h i r d , a n d F o u r t h I D E M a s t e r / S l a v e While entering Setup, the BIOS automatically detects the presence of IDE devices. There is a separate sub-menu for each IDE device. Select a device item then press <Enter> to display the IDE device information. Primary IDE Master Select the type of device connected to the system. Device : Hard Disk Vendor : ST320410A Size : 20.0GB LBA Mode : Supported Block Mode : 16 Sectors PIO Mode : 4 Async DMA : MultiWord DMA-2 Ultra DMA : Ultra DMA-5 SMART Monitoring : Supported Type [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Block(Multi-sector Transfer) M [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] 32Bit Data Transfer [Enabled] The BIOS automatically detects the values opposite the dimmed items (Device, Vendor, Size, LBA Mode, Block Mode, PIO Mode, Async DMA, Ultra DMA, and SMART monitoring). These values are not user-conï¬gurable. These items show N/A if no IDE device is installed in the system. T y p e [ A u t o ] Selects the type of IDE drive. Setting to Auto allows automatic selection of the appropriate IDE device type. Select CDROM if you are speciï¬cally conï¬guring a CD-ROM drive. Select ARMD (ATAPI Removable Media Device) if your device is either a ZIP, LS-120, or MO drive. Conï¬guration options: [Not Installed] [Auto] [CDROM] [ARMD] L B A / L a r g e M o d e [ A u t o ] Enables or disables the LBA mode. Setting to Auto enables the LBA mode if the device supports this mode, and if the device was not previously formatted with LBA mode disabled. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Auto] B l o c k ( M u l t i - s e c t o r T r a n s f e r ) [ A u t o ] Enables or disables data multi-sectors transfers. When set to Auto, the data transfer from and to the device occurs multiple sectors at a time if the device supports multi-sector transfer feature. When set to [Disabled], the data transfer from and to the device occurs one sector at a time. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Auto]
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 1 5 P I O M o d e [ A u t o ] Selects the PIO mode. Conï¬guration options: [Auto] [0] [1] [2] [3] [4] D M A M o d e [ A u t o ] Allows the BIOS to automatically select the DMA mode. Conï¬guration option: [Auto] [SWDMA0] [SWDMA1] [SWDMA2] [MWDMA0] [MWDMA1] [MWDMA2] [UDMA0] [UDMA1] [UDMA2] [UDMA3] [UDMA4] [UDMA5] S M A R T M o n i t o r i n g [ A u t o ] Sets the Smart Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology. Conï¬guration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] 3 2 B i t D a t a T r a n s f e r [ E n a b l e d ] Enables or disables 32-bit data transfer. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4 . 3 . 5 I D E C o n f i g u r a t i o n The items in this menu allow you to set or change the conï¬gurations for the IDE devices installed in the system. Select an item then press <Enter> if you want to conï¬gure the item. IDE Conï¬guration Conï¬gure SATA As [Standard IDE] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Enhanced Mode Support On [S-ATA] IDE Detect Time Out (Sec) [35] C o n f i g u r e S A T A A s [ S t a n d a r d I D E ] Sets the Serial ATA conï¬guration. When set in Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI) or RAID mode the SATA controller is set to Native mode. Conï¬guration options: [Standard IDE] [AHCI] [RAID] O n b o a r d I D E O p e r a t e M o d e [ E n h a n c e d M o d e ] Allows selection of the IDE operation mode depending on the operating system (OS) that you installed. Set to Enhanced Mode if you are using native OS, such as Windows ® 2000. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Compatible Mode] [Enhanced Mode] When in AHCI/RAID mode, SATA controller is forced to Native mode.
4 - 1 6 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p If the Onboard IDE Operate Mode is set to [Compatible], you can only use the SATA2, SATA4, and P-ATA connectors. Enhanced Mode Support On [S-ATA] The default setting SATA allows you to use native OS on Serial ATA and Parallel ATA ports. We recommend that you do not change the default setting for better OS compatibility. In this setting, you may use legacy OS on the Parallel ATA ports only if you did not install any Serial ATA device. The S-ATA P-ATA and P-ATA options are for advanced users only. If you set to any of these options and encounter problems, revert to the default setting SATA. Conï¬guration options: [S-ATA P-ATA] [S-ATA] [P-ATA] The Onboard IDE Operate Mode and its submenu items appear only when the Conï¬gure SATA As item is set to Standard IDE. Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM [Disabled] Enables or disables the onboard Serial ATA boot ROM. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM item appears only when the Conï¬gure SATA As item is set to RAID. ALPE and ASP [Disabled] Enables or disables the ALPE and ASP. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] S t a g g e r S p i n u p S u p p o r t [ D i s a b l e d ] Enables or disables the stagger spinup support. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] A H C I P o r t 3 I n t e r l o c k S w i t c h [ D i s a b l e d ] Enables or disables the Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI) Port 3 interlock switch. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The ALPE and ASP item appears only when the Conï¬gure SATA As item is set to AHCI. I D E D e t e c t T i m e O u t [ 3 5 ] Selects the time out value for detecting ATA/ATAPI devices. Conï¬guration options: [0] [5] [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [35]
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 1 7 4 . 3 . 6 S y s t e m I n f o r m a t i o n This menu gives you an overview of the general system speciï¬cations. The BIOS automatically detects the items in this menu. A M I B I O S Displays the auto-detected BIOS information. P r o c e s s o r Displays the auto-detected CPU speciï¬cation. S y s t e m M e m o r y Displays the auto-detected system memory. AMIBIOS Version : 08.00.11 Build Date : 12/12/05 Processor Type : Genuine Intel(R) CPU 3.20 GHz Speed : 3200 MHz Count : 1 System Memory Size : 512 MB
4 - 1 8 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4.4 Advanced menu The Advanced menu items allow you to change the settings for the CPU and other system devices. Take caution when changing the settings of the Advanced menu items. Incorrect ï¬eld values can cause the system to malfunction. USB Conï¬guration MPS Conï¬guration Remote Access Conï¬guration CPU Conï¬guration Chipset Onboard Devices Conï¬guration PCIPnP USB settings. The Module Version and USB Devices Enabled items show the auto-detected values. If no USB device is detected, the item shows None. 4 . 4 . 1 U S B C o n f i g u r a t i o n The items in this menu allow you to change the USB-related features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conï¬guration options. USB Conï¬guration Module Version - 2.24.0-F.4 USB Devices Enabled: None USB Function [8 USB Ports] Legacy USB Support [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] BIOS EHCI Hand-Off [Enabled] Enables USB host controllers.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 1 9 U S B F u n c t i o n [ 8 U S B P o r t s ] Allows you to disable or set the USB host controllers. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [2 USB Ports] [4 USB Ports] [6 USB Ports] [8 USB Ports] L e g a c y U S B S u p p o r t [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable support for USB devices on legacy operating systems (OS). Setting to Auto allows the system to detect the presence of USB devices at startup. If detected, the USB controller legacy mode is enabled. If no USB device is detected, the legacy USB support is disabled. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] U S B 2 . 0 C o n t r o l l e r [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the USB 2.0 controller. Conï¬guration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] U S B 2 . 0 C o n t r o l l e r M o d e [ H i S p e e d ] Allows you to set the USB 2.0 controller mode to HiSpeed (480 Mbps) or FullSpeed (12 Mbps). Conï¬guration options: [FullSpeed ] [HiSpeed ] B I O S E H C I H a n d - O f f [ E n a b l e d ] This is a workaround for operating systems without EHCI hand-off support. The ownership should be claimed by the EHCI driver. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4 . 4 . 2 M P S C o n f i g u r a t i o n This menu allows you to conï¬gure the Multi-Processor table. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conï¬guration options. MPS Conï¬guration MPS Revision [1.4] M P S R e v i s i o n [ 1 . 4 ] Allows you to choose the MPS revision. Conï¬guration options: [1.1] [1.4] Select MPS Revision.
4 - 2 0 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4 . 4 . 3 R e m o t e A c c e s s C o n f i g u r a t i o n The items in this menu allow you to conï¬gure the Remote Access features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conï¬guration options. Conï¬gure Remote Access type and parameters Remote Access [Disabled] Select Remote Access type. R e m o t e A c c e s s [ D i s a b l e d ] Enables or disables the remote access feature. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The succeeding items appear only when the item Remote Access is set to [Enabled]. S e r i a l p o r t n u m b e r [ C O M 1 ] Sets the serial port for console redirection. Make sure the selected port is enabled. Conï¬guration options: [COM1] [COM2] B a s e A d d r e s s , I R Q [ 3 F 8 h , 4 ] Sets the base address and IRQ assignment of the selected serial port . This item is auto-detected and is not user-conï¬gurable. S e r i a l P o r t M o d e [ 1 1 5 2 0 0 , 8 , n , 1 ] Allows you to select the serial port mode settings. Conï¬guration options: [115200 8,n,1] [57600 8,n,1] [38400 8,n,1] [19200 8,n,1] [09600 8,n,1] F l o w C o n t r o l [ N o n e ] Allows you to select the ï¬ow control for console redirection. Conï¬guration options: [None] [Hardware] [Software] R e d i r e c t i o n a f t e r B I O S P O S T [ A l w a y s ] Sets the redirection mode after the BIOS Power-On Self-Test (POST). Some operating systems may not work when you set the item to [Always]. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Boot Loader] [Always] T e r m i n a l T y p e [ A N S I ] Allows you to select the target terminal type. Conï¬guration options: [ANSI] [VT100] [VT-UTF8]
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 2 1 4 . 4 . 4 C P U C o n f i g u r a t i o n The items in this menu show the CPU-related information that the BIOS automatically detects. Conï¬gure advanced CPU Settings Manufacturer : Intel Brand String : Genuine Intel (R) CPU 3.20GHz Frequency : 3200 MHz FSB Speed : 800 MHz Cache L1 : 16 KB Cache L2 : 1024 KB Cache L3 : 0 KB Ratio Status: Unlocked (Max:16, Min:14) Ratio Actual Value : 14 Max CPUID Value Limit: [Disabled] Execute Disable Function [Disabled] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] Hardware Prefetcher: [Enabled] Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch: [Enabled] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] Sets the ratio between CPU Core Clock and the FSB Frequency. NOTE: If an invalid ratio is set in CMOS then actual and setpoint values may differ. M a x C P U I D V a l u e L i m i t [ D i s a b l e d ] Enable this item to boot legacy operating systems that cannot support CPUs with extended CPUID functions. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] E x e c u t e D i s a b l e F u n c t i o n [ D i s a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the execute disable function. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] E n h a n c e d C 1 C o n t r o l [ A u t o ] When set to [Auto], the BIOS will automatically check the CPUʼs capability to enable the C1E support. In C1E mode, the CPU power consumption is lower when idle. Conï¬guration options: [Auto] [Disabled] H a r d w a r e P r e f e t c h e r [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the hardware prefetcher feature. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] A d j a c e n t C a c h e L i n e P r e f e t c h [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the adjacent cache line prefetch feature. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] V T - U T F 8 C o m b o K e y S u p p o r t [ E n a b l e d ] Enables or disables the VT-UTF8 combo key support for ANSI or VT100 terminals. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4 - 2 2 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p C P U I n t e r n a l T h e r m a l C o n t r o l [ A u t o ] Disables or sets the CPU internal thermal control. Conï¬guration options: [Auto] [Disabled] The following item appears only when you installed an Intel ® Pentium ® 4 processor that supports Hyper Threading Technology . H y p e r T h r e a d i n g T e c h n o l o g y [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the processor Hyper Threading Technology. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The following item appears only when you installed an Intel ® Pentium ® 4 processor that supports Intel ® Speedstep technology. I n t e l ( R ) S p e e d S t e p T e c h n o l o g y [ A u t o m a t i c ] Allows you to use the Enhanced Intel SpeedStep ® Technology. When set to [Automatic], you can adjust the system power settings in the operating system to use the EIST feature. Se t t hi s i te m t o [Di sab le d] if you do not want to use the EIST. Conï¬guration options: [Automatic] [Disabled] ⢠Refer to the Appendix for details on how to use the EIST feature. ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS ï¬le that supports EIST.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 2 3 4 . 4 . 5 C h i p s e t The Chipset menu allows you to change the advanced chipset settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Manual DRAM Frequency Setting or Auto by SPD. Advanced Chipset Settings DRAM Frequency [Auto] Conï¬gure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Onboard LAN Boot ROM [Enabled] PEG Port Conï¬guration PEG Port [Enabled] PEG Port VC1 Map [TC7] PEG Force x1 [Disabled] Memory Remap Feature [Enabled] D R A M F r e q u e n c y [ A u t o ] Allows you to manually set the DRAM frequency. Setting to [Auto] allows the BIOS to automatically set the DRAM frequency by Serial Presence Detect (SPD). Conï¬guration options: [Auto] [533 MHz] [667 MHz] C o n f i g u r e D R A M T i m i n g b y S P D [ E n a b l e d ] When this item is enabled, the DRAM timing parameters are set according to the DRAM SPD (Serial Presence Detect). When disabled, you can manually set the DRAM timing parameters through the DRAM sub-items. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The following sub-items appear when this item is Disabled. DRAM CAS# Latency [5 Clocks] Controls the latency between the SDRAM read command and the time the data actually becomes available. Conï¬guration options: [5 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [6 Clocks] DRAM RAS# Precharge [4 Clocks] Controls the idle clocks after issuing a precharge command to the DDR SDRAM. Conï¬guration options: [2 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [5 Clocks] DRAM RAS# to CAS# Delay [4 Clocks] Controls the latency between the DDR SDRAM active command and the read/write command. Conï¬guration options: [2 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [5 Clocks] DRAM RAS# Activate to Precharge Delay [15 Clocks] Conï¬guration options: [1 Clock] ~ [15 Clocks]
4 - 2 4 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p DRAM Write Recovery Time [4 Clocks] Sets the DRAM write recovery time. Conï¬guration options: [2 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [5 Clocks] O n b o a r d L A N B o o t R O M [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard LAN boot ROM. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] P E G P o r t [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the PCI Express Graphics port. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] P E G P o r t V C 1 M a p [ T C 7 ] Allows you to disable or set the PCI Express Graphics port VC1 map. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [TC1] ~ [TC7] P E G F o r c e x 1 [ D i s a b l e d ] Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] M e m o r y R e m a p F e a t u r e [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the memory remap feature. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] If you set the Memory Remap Feature item disabled, system may only show less than 4 GB memory due to chipset resource allocation when you installed four 1GB memory modules.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 2 5 4 . 4 . 6 O n b o a r d D e v i c e s C o n f i g u r a t i o n Conï¬gure Win627EHF Super IO Chipset Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port2 Address [2F8/IRQ3] Serial Port2 Mode [Normal] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] Parallel Port IRQ [IRQ7] S e r i a l P o r t 1 A d d r e s s [ 3 F 8 / I R Q 4 ] Allows you to select the Serial Port1 base address. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [3F8/IRQ4] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] S e r i a l P o r t 2 A d d r e s s [ 2 F 8 / I R Q 3 ] Allows you to select the Serial Port1 base address. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [2F8/IRQ3] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] S e r i a l P o r t 2 M o d e [ N o r m a l ] Allows the BIOS to select the Serial Port 2 mode. Conï¬guration options: [Normal] [IrDA] [ASK IR] P a r a l l e l P o r t A d d r e s s [ 3 7 8 ] Allows you to select the Parallel Port base addresses. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [378] [278] [3BC] P a r a l l e l P o r t M o d e [ E C P ] Allows you to select the Parallel Port mode. Conï¬guration options: [Normal] [Bi-directional] [EPP] [ECP] E C P M o d e D M A C h a n n e l [ D M A 3 ] Appears only when the Parallel Port Mode is set to [ECP]. This item allows you to set the Parallel Port ECP DMA. Conï¬guration options: [DMA0] [DMA1] [DMA3] E P P V e r s i o n [ 1 . 9 ] Allows selection of the Parallel Port EPP version. This item appears only when the Parallel Port Mode is set to EPP. Conï¬guration options: [1.9] [1.7] P a r a l l e l P o r t I R Q [ I R Q 7 ] Allows selection of the Parallel Port IRQ. Conï¬guration options: [IRQ5] [IRQ7] Enable or disable the Azalia controller.
4 - 2 6 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4 . 4 . 7 P C I P n P The PCI PnP menu items allow you to change the advanced settings for PCI/PnP devices. The menu includes setting IRQ and DMA channel resources for either PCI/PnP or legacy ISA devices, and setting the memory size block for legacy ISA devices. Take caution when changing the settings of the PCI PnP menu items. Incorrect ï¬eld values can cause the system to malfunction. Advanced PCI/PnP Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. Plug And Play O/S [No] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Palette Snooping [Disabled] IRQ-3 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-4 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-5 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-7 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-9 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-10 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-11 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-14 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-15 assigned to [PCI Device] P l u g a n d P l a y O / S [ N o ] When set to [No], BIOS conï¬gures all the devices in the system. When set to [Yes] and if you install a Plug and Play operating system, the operating system conï¬gures the Plug and Play devices not required for boot. Conï¬guration options: [No] [Yes] P C I L a t e n c y T i m e r [ 6 4 ] Allows you to select the value in units of PCI clocks for the PCI device latency timer register. Conï¬guration options: [32] [64] [96] [128] [160] [192] [224] [248] A l l o c a t e I R Q t o P C I V G A [ Y e s ] When set to [Yes], BIOS assigns an IRQ to PCI VGA card if the card requests for an IRQ. When set to [No], BIOS does not assign an IRQ to the PCI VGA card even if requested. Conï¬guration options: [Yes] [No] P a l e t t e S n o o p i n g [ D i s a b l e d ] When set to [Enabled], the palette snooping feature informs the PCI devices that an ISA graphics device is installed in the system so that the latter can function correctly. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] No: Lets the BIOS conï¬gure all the devices in the system. Yes: Lets the operating system conï¬gure Plug and Play (PnP) devices not required for boot if your system has a Plug and Play operating system.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 2 7 4.5 Power menu The Power menu items allow you to change the settings for the ACPI and Advanced Power Management (APM). Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conï¬guration options. 4 . 5 . 1 A C P I A P I C S u p p o r t [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the Advanced Conï¬guration and Power Interface (ACPI) support in the Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC). When set to Enabled, the ACPI APIC table pointer is included in the RSDT pointer list. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] APM Conï¬guration Hardware Monitor Select the ACPI state used for System Suspend. I R Q - x x a s s i g n e d t o [ P C I D e v i c e ] When set to [PCI Device], the speciï¬c IRQ is free for use of PCI/PnP devices. When set to [Reserved], the IRQ is reserved for legacy ISA devices. Conï¬guration options: [PCI Device] [Reserved]
4 - 2 8 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4 . 5 . 2 A P M C o n f i g u r a t i o n APM Conï¬guration Restore on AC Power Loss [Last State] Resume On RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Resume On Ring [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Keyboard Wakeup Password : Not Installed R e s t o r e o n A C P o w e r L o s s [ L a s t S t a t e ] When set to Power Off, the system goes into off state after an AC power loss. When set to Power On, the system goes on after an AC power loss. When set to Last State, the system goes into either off or on state, whatever the system state was before the AC power loss. Conï¬guration options: [Power Off] [Power On] [Last State] R e s u m e O n R T C A l a r m [ D i s a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable RTC to generate a wake event. When this item is set to Enabled, the items RTC Alarm Date, RTC Alarm Hour, RTC Alarm Minute, and RTC Alarm Second appear with set values. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] P o w e r O n B y P S / 2 K e y b o a r d [ D i s a b l e d ] Allows you to use speciï¬c keys on the keyboard to turn on the system. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] P o w e r O n B y P S / 2 M o u s e [ D i s a b l e d ] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to use the PS/2 mouse to turn on the system. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] R e s u m e O n R i n g [ D i s a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the RI to generate a wake event. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Options Power Off Power On Last State
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 2 9 P o w e r O n B y P C I D e v i c e s [ D i s a b l e d ] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to turn on the system through a PCI LAN or modem card. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] K e y b o a r d W a k e u p P a s s w o r d This item appears only when the Power On By PS/2 Keyboard is set to Enabled. Select this item to set or change the keyboard wakeup password. The Keyboard Wakeup Password item that appears below shows the default Not Installed. After you have set a password, this item shows Installed. 4 . 5 . 3 H a r d w a r e M o n i t o r Hardware Monitor CPU Temperature [51ºC/122.5ºF] MB Temperature [41ºC/105.5ºF] CPU Fan1 Speed [3813 RPM] CPU Fan2 Speed [N/A] Front Fan1 Speed [N/A] Front Fan2 Speed [N/A] Rear Fan1 Speed [N/A] Rear Fan2 Speed [N/A] Smart Fan Control [Enabled] VCORE Voltage [ 1.320V] 3.3V Voltage [ 3.345V] 5V Voltage [ 5.094V] 5VSB Voltage [ 4.824V] VBAT Voltage [ 3.040V] 12V Voltage [11.880V] CPU1 Temperature C P U T e m p e r a t u r e [ x x x º C / x x x º F ] M B T e m p e r a t u r e [ x x x º C / x x x º F ] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the motherboard, CPU, and ambient temperatures. Select [Ignored] if you do not wish to display the detected temperatures.
4 - 3 0 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p C P U F a n 1 / 2 S p e e d [ x x x x R P M ] o r [ N / A ] F r o n t F a n 1 / 2 S p e e d [ x x x x R P M ] o r [ N / A ] R e a r F a n 1 / 2 S p e e d [ x x x x R P M ] o r [ N / A ] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the CPU fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the motherboard, the ï¬eld shows N/A. S m a r t F a n C o n t r o l [ E n a b l e d ] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Smart Fan feature that smartly adjusts the fan speeds for more efï¬cient system operation. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] When Smart Fan Control item is set to [Enabled], the CPU Target Temperature and MB Target Temperature items appear. C P U T a r e g e t T e m p e r a t u r e [ x x x ] M B T a r e g e t T e m p e r a t u r e [ x x x ] Allows you to set the temperature threshold when the CPU fan speed is increased. If the CPU/MB temperature is above your setting, the CPU fan runs at its maximum speed. If the CPU/MB temperature is below your setting, the CPU fan runs at a lower speed. To set, use the <-> or < > key. V C O R E V o l t a g e , 3 . 3 V V o l t a g e , 5 V V o l t a g e , 5 V S B V o l t a g e , V B A T V o l t a g e , 1 2 V V o l t a g e The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects the voltage output through the onboard voltage regulators.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 3 1 Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub-screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 4.6 Boot menu The Boot menu items allow you to change the system boot options. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Boot Settings Boot Device Priority Boot Settings Conï¬guration Security 4 . 6 . 1 B o o t D e v i c e P r i o r i t y 1 s t ~ x x t h B o o t D e v i c e [ 1 s t F l o p p y D r i v e ] These items specify the boot device priority sequence from the available devices. The number of device items that appears on the screen depends on the number of devices installed in the system. Conï¬guration options: [xxxxx Drive] [Disabled] Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device [1st FLOPPY DRIVE] 2nd Boot Device [Hard Drive] 3rd Boot Device [ATAPI CD-ROM] 4th Boot Device [Network: MBA v8.1.5] Speciï¬es the Boot Device Boot Priority sequence. Speciï¬es the boot sequence from the availabe devices.
4 - 3 2 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p 4 . 6 . 2 B o o t S e t t i n g s C o n f i g u r a t i o n Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Boot Settings Conï¬guration Quick Boot [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] AddOn ROM Display Mode [ForceBIOS] Bootup Num-Lock [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Wait For âF1â If Error [Enabled] Hit âDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Enabled] Allows BIOS to skip certain tests while booting. This will decrease the time needed to boot the system. Q u i c k B o o t [ E n a b l e d ] Enabling this item allows the BIOS to skip some power on self tests (POST) while booting to decrease the time needed to boot the system. When set to [Disabled], BIOS performs all the POST items. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] F u l l S c r e e n L o g o [ E n a b l e d ] This allows you to enable or disable the full screen logo display feature. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Set this item to [Enabled] to use the ASUS MyLogo2⢠feature. A d d O n R O M D i s p l a y M o d e [ F o r c e B I O S ] Sets the display mode for the option ROM. Conï¬guration options: [ForceBIOS] [Keep Current] B o o t u p N u m - L o c k [ O n ] Allows you to select the power-on state for the NumLock. Conï¬guration options: [Off] [On] P S / 2 M o u s e S u p p o r t [ A u t o ] Allows you to enable or disable support for PS/2 mouse. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] W a i t f o r Ê» F 1 ʼ I f E r r o r [ E n a b l e d ] When set to Enabled, the system waits for the F1 key to be pressed when error occurs. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 3 3 H i t Ê» D E L ʼ M e s s a g e D i s p l a y [ E n a b l e d ] When set to Enabled, the system displays the message âPress DEL to run Setupâ during POST. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] I n t e r r u p t 1 9 C a p t u r e [ E n a b l e d ] When set to [Enabled], this function allows the option ROMs to trap Interrupt 19. Conï¬guration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4 . 6 . 3 S e c u r i t y The Security menu items allow you to change the system security settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conï¬guration options. Security Settings Supervisor Password : Not Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password Change User Password <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disabled password. C h a n g e S u p e r v i s o r P a s s w o r d Select this item to set or change the supervisor password. The Supervisor Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. To set a Supervisor Password: 1. Select the Change Supervisor Password item and press <Enter>. 2. From the password box, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Conï¬rm the password when prompted. The message âPassword Installedâ appears after you successfully set your password. To change the supervisor password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. To clear the supervisor password, select the Change Supervisor Password then press <Enter>. The message âPassword Uninstalledâ appears.
4 - 3 4 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p After you have set a supervisor password, the other items appear to allow you to change other security settings. U s e r A c c e s s L e v e l ( F u l l A c c e s s ] This item allows you to select the access restriction to the Setup items. Conï¬guration options: [No Access] [View Only] [Limited] [Full Access] No Access prevents user access to the Setup utility. View Only allows access but does not allow change to any ï¬eld. Limited allows changes only to selected ï¬elds, such as Date and Time. Full Access allows viewing and changing all the ï¬elds in the Setup utility. C h a n g e U s e r P a s s w o r d Select this item to set or change the user password. The User Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. To set a User Password: 1. Select the Change User Password item and press <Enter>. 2. On the password box that appears, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Conï¬rm the password when prompted. If you forget your BIOS password, you can clear it by erasing the CMOS Real Time Clock (RTC) RAM. See section â2.6 Jumpersâ for information on how to erase the RTC RAM. Security Settings Supervisor Password : Installed User Password : Installed Change Supervisor Password User Access Level [Full Access] Change User Password Clear User Password Password Check [Setup] <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disabled password.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 4 - 3 5 The message âPassword Installedâ appears after you set your password successfully. To change the user password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. C l e a r U s e r P a s s w o r d Select this item to clear the user password. P a s s w o r d C h e c k [ S e t u p ] When set to [Setup], BIOS checks for user password when accessing the Setup utility. When set to [Always], BIOS checks for user password both when accessing Setup and booting the system. Conï¬guration options: [Setup] [Always] 4.7 Exit menu Pressing <Esc> does not immediately exit this menu. Select one of the options from this menu or <F10> from the legend bar to exit. The Exit menu items allow you to load the optimal or failsafe default values for the BIOS items, and save or discard your changes to the BIOS items. Exit Options Exit & Save Changes Exit & Discard Changes Discard Changes Load Setup Defaults Exit system setup after saving the changes. F10 key can be used for this operation.
4 - 3 6 C h a p t e r 4 : B I O S s e t u p E x i t & D i s c a r d C h a n g e s Select this option only if you do not want to save the changes that you made to the Setup program. If you made changes to ï¬elds other than System Date, System Time, and Password, the BIOS asks for a conï¬rmation before exiting. D i s c a r d C h a n g e s This option allows you to discard the selections you made and restore the previously saved values. After selecting this option, a conï¬rmation appears. Select OK to discard any changes and load the previously saved values. L o a d S e t u p D e f a u l t s This option allows you to load the default values for each of the parameters on the Setup menus. When you select this option or if you press <F5>, a conï¬rmation window appears. Select OK to load default values. Select Exit & Save Changes or make other changes before saving the values to the non-volatile RAM. If you attempt to exit the Setup program without saving your changes, the program prompts you with a message asking if you want to save your changes before exiting. Press <Enter> to save the changes while exiting. E x i t & S a v e C h a n g e s Once you are ï¬nished making your selections, choose this option from the Exit menu to ensure the values you selected are saved to the CMOS RAM. An onboard backup battery sustains the CMOS RAM so it stays on even when the PC is turned off. When you select this option, a conï¬rmation window appears. Select OK to save changes and exit.
5 RAID support This chapter provides information on RAID conï¬gurations for this motherboard.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C Chapter summary 5 5.1 RAID conï¬gurations .............................................................. 5-1 5.2 Intel Matrix Storage Manager option ROM utility .................. 5-3 5.3 LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility .................... 5-12 5.4 Global Array Manager .......................................................... 5-34
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 1 5.1 RAID conï¬gurations The server system/motherboard comes with the Intel ® ICH7R and the LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID technology built-in the Intel ® ICH7R SouthBridge chipset that allows you to conï¬gure IDE and Serial ATA hard disk drives as RAID sets. The motherboard supports the following RAID conï¬gurations: 5 . 1 . 1 R A I D d e f i n i t i o n s RAID 0 (Data striping) optimizes two identical hard disk drives to read and write data in parallel, interleaved stacks. Two hard disks perform the same work as a single drive but at a sustained data transfer rate, double that of a single disk alone, thus improving data access and storage. Use of two new identical hard disk drives is required for this setup. RAID 1 (Data mirroring) copies and maintains an identical image of data from one drive to a second drive. If one drive fails, the disk array management software directs all applications to the surviving drive as it contains a complete copy of the data in the other drive. This RAID conï¬guration provides data protection and increases fault tolerance to the entire system. Use two new drives or use an existing drive and a new drive for this setup. The new drive must be of the same size or larger than the existing drive. RAID 5 stripes both data and parity information across three or more hard disk drives. Among the advantages of RAID 5 conï¬guration include better HDD performance, fault tolerance, and higher storage capacity. The RAID 5 conï¬guration is best suited for transaction processing, relational database applications, enterprise resource planning, and other business systems. Use a minimum of three identical hard disk drives for this setup. RAID 10 is a striped conï¬guration with RAID 1 segments whose segments are RAID 1 arrays. This conï¬guration has the same fault tolerance as RAID 1, and has the same overhead for fault-tolerance as mirroring alone. RAID 10 achieves high input/output rates by striping RAID 1 segments. In some instances, a RAID 10 conï¬guration can sustain multiple simultaneous drive failure. A minimum of four hard disk drives is required for this setup. Intel ® Matrix Storage. The Intel ® Matrix Storage technology supported by the ICH7R chip allows you to create a RAID 0 and a RAID 1 set using only two identical hard disk drives. The Intel ® Matrix Storage technology creates two partitions on each hard disk drive to create a virtual RAID 0 and RAID 1 sets. This technology also allows you to change the hard disk drive partition size without losing any data. If you want to boot the system from a hard disk drive included in a created RAID set, copy ï¬rst the RAID driver from the support CD to a ï¬oppy disk before you install an operating system to the selected hard disk drive. Refer to section â6.1 RAID driver installationâ for details.
5 - 2 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 5 . 1 . 2 I n s t a l l i n g S e r i a l A T A h a r d d i s k s The motherboard supports Serial ATA hard disk drives. For optimal performance, install identical drives of the same model and capacity when creating a disk array. To install the SATA hard disks for a RAID conï¬guration: 1. Install the SATA hard disks into the drive bays. 2. Connect the SATA signal cables. 3. Connect a SATA power cable to the power connector on each drive. 5 . 1 . 3 S e t t i n g t h e R A I D i t e m i n B I O S You must set the RAID item in the BIOS Setup before you can create a RAID set(s). To do this: 1. Enter the BIOS Setup during POST. 2. Go to th e Mai n Men u, se le ct ID E C on ï¬gu ra tio n, th en pr ess < Ent er >. 3. Select the item Co nï¬g ure S ATA A s, then press <Enter> to display the conï¬guration options. 4. Select RA ID from the Conï¬gure SATA As item options, then press <Enter>. 5. Select the item On boa rd Se ria l- ATA B OOT RO M, press <Enter>, then select En abl ed from the options. 6. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup. Refer to Chapter 4 for details on entering and navigating through the BIOS Setup. 5 . 1 . 4 R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n u t i l i t y Depending on the RAID_SEL1 jumper setting and the operating system, you can select a utility to create a RAID set. Refer to section â2.6 Jumpersâ for details on the RAID_SEL1 jumper settings. Use the Intel ® Matrix Storag e Manage r to create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1, or software RAID 5 under Windows ® 2000/2003 Server/XP operating system. Use t he LSI L ogi c Embed ded SATA RAI D Setup U til ity t o crea te a RAID 0 , R A I D 1 , o r R A ID 0 1 u n d e r W i n d o w s ® 2 0 0 0 / 2 0 0 3 S e r v e r /X P o r Red Hat ® Enterprise ver. 3.0 operating system. R ef e r to t he s uc c e e di n g se c t i on s f or d et a i l s on ho w to u s e t h e R A I D conï¬guration utilities.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 3 5.2 Intel ® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility The Intel ® Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM utility allows you to create RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10 (RAID 0 1), and RAID 5 set(s) from Serial ATA hard disk drives that are connected to the Serial ATA connectors supported by the Southbridge. To enter the Intel ® Application Accelerator RAID Option ROM utility: 1. Install all the Serial ATA hard disk drives. 2. Turn on the system. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ MAIN MENU ] 1. Create RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 4. Exit [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] RAID Volumes: None deï¬ned. Physical Disks: Port Drive Model Serial # Size Type/Status(Vol ID) 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk [ ââ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu The navigation keys at the bottom of the screen allow you to move through the menus and select the menu options. The RAID BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference only and may not exactly match the items on your screen.
5 - 4 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 5 . 2 . 1 C r e a t i n g a R A I D 0 s e t ( s t r i p e d ) To create a RAID 0 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID Volume, then press <Enter>. This screen appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 0 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 0(Stripe), then press <Enter>. 4. When the Disks item is highlighted, press <Enter> to select the hard disk drives to conï¬gure as RAID. This pop-up screen appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. [ ââ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume0 RAID0(Stripe) Select Disks 128KB 0.0 GB Create Volume [ SELECT DISKS ] [ ââ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk Select 2 to 4 disks to use in creating the volume. 5. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight a drive, then press <Space> to select. A small triangle marks the selected drive. Press <Enter> after completing your selection.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 5 6. Use the up/down arrow key to select the stripe size for the RAID 0 array, then press <Enter>. The available stripe size values range from 4 KB to 128 KB. The default stripe size is 128 KB. WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 9. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to the main menu, or <N> to go back to the Create Volume menu. TIP: We recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing. 7. Key in the RAID volume capacity that you want, then press <Enter>. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity. 8. Press <Enter> when the Create Volume item is highlighted. This warning message appears.
5 - 6 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 5 . 2 . 2 C r e a t i n g a R A I D 1 s e t ( m i r r o r e d ) To create a RAID 1 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID Volume, then press <Enter>. This screen appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 1 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 1(Mirror), then press <Enter>. 4. When the Capacity item is highlighted, key in the RAID volume capacity that you want, then press <Enter>. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity. 5. Press <Enter> when the Create Volume item is highlighted. This warning message appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. [ ââ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume1 RAID1(Mirror) Select Disks N/A XX.X GB Create Volume WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 6. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to main menu or <N> to go back to Create Volume menu.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 7 5 . 2 . 3 C r e a t i n g a R A I D 1 0 s e t ( R A I D 0 1 ) To create a RAID 10 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID Volume, then press <Enter>. This screen appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 10 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 10(RAID0 1), then press <Enter>. 4. When the Stripe Size item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select the stripe size for the RAID 10 array, then press <Enter>. The available stripe size values range from 4 KB to 128 KB. The default stripe size is 64 KB. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume10 RAID10(RAID0 1) Select Disks 128KB XXX.X GB Create Volume [ ââ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select TIP: We recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing. 5. Key in the RAID volume capacity that you want then press <Enter> when the Capacity item is highlighted. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity.
5 - 8 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 5 . 2 . 4 C r e a t i n g a R A I D 5 s e t ( p a r i t y ) To create a RAID 5 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID Volume, then press <Enter>. This screen appears. WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 7. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to the main menu or <N> to go back to the Create Volume menu. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume5 RAID5(Parity) Select Disks 64KB 0.0 GB Create Volume [ ââ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select 6. Press <Enter> when the Create Volume item is highlighted. This warning message appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 5 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 5(Parity), then press <Enter>.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 9 4. The Disks item is highlighted, press <Enter> to select the hard disk drives to conï¬gure as RAID. The following pop-up screen appears. [ SELECT DISKS ] [ ââ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk Select 2 to 4 disks to use in creating the volume. 5. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight the drive you want to set, then press <Space> to select. A small triangle marks the selected drive. Press <Enter> after completing your selection. 6. When the Stripe Size item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select the stripe size for the RAID 5 array, then press <Enter>. The available stripe size values range from 4 KB to 128 KB. The default stripe size is 64 KB. WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 9. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to the main menu or <N> to go back to the Create Volume menu. TIP: We recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing. 7. Key in the RAID volume capacity that you want, then press <Enter> when the Capacity item is highlighted. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity. 8. Press <Enter> when the Create Volume item is highlighted. This warning message appears.
5 - 1 0 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 5 . 2 . 5 D e l e t i n g a R A I D s e t 2. Use the up/down arrow key to select the RAID set you want to delete, then press <Del>. This window appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ DELETE VOLUME MENU ] Name Level Drives Capacity Status Bootable Volume0 RAIDX(xxxxx) X XXX.XGB Normal Yes [ HELP ] Deleting a volume will destroy the volume data on the drive(s) and cause any member disks to become available as non-RAID disks. WARNING: EXISTING DATA WITHIN THIS VOLUME WILL BE LOST AND NON-RECOVERABLE. [ ââ]-Select [<ESC>]-Previous Menu [<Del>]-Delete Volume 3. Press <Y> to delete the RAID set and return to the utility main menu; otherwise, press <N> to return to the Delete Volume menu. ALL DATA IN THE VOLUME WILL BE LOST! Are you sure you want to delete volume âVolumeXâ? (Y/N): [ DELETE VOLUME VERIFICATION ] Take caution when deleting a RAID set. You will lose all data on the hard disk drives when you delete a RAID set. To delete a RAID set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 2. Delete RAID Volume, then press <Enter> to display this screen.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 1 1 5 . 2 . 7 E x i t i n g t h e I n t e l ® M a t r i x S t o r a g e M a n a g e r u t i l i t y To exit the utility: 1. From the utility main menu, select 4. Exit, then press <Enter>. This window appears. Are you sure you want to exit? (Y/N): [ CONFIRM EXIT ] 2. Press <Y> to exit or press <N> to return to the utility main menu. 5 . 2 . 6 R e s e t t i n g D i s k s t o N o n - R A I D 2. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight the RAID set drive you want to reset, then press <Space> to select. 3. Press <Enter> to reset the RAID set drive. A conï¬ rmation message appears. 4. Press <Y> to reset the drive or press <N> to return to the utility main menu. 5. Follow steps 2 to 4 to select and reset other RAID set drives. [ RESET RAID DATA ] Resetting RAID data will remove internal RAID structures from the selected RAID disks. By removing these structures, the drive will revert back to a non-RAID disk. WARNING: Resetting a disk causes all data on the disk to be lost. Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Member Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Member Disk Select the disks that should be reset. [ ââ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete Take ca utio n be for e yo u re set a R AID volu me HDD to n on- RAID . Re sett ing a RA ID volu me H DD dele tes all int erna l RA ID stru ctur e o n th e dr ive. To reset a RAID set hard disk drive: 1. From the utility main menu, select 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID, then press <Enter> to display this screen.
5 - 1 2 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 5.3 LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility The LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility allows you to create RAID 0, RAID 1, and RAID 10 set(s) from SATA hard disk drives connected to the SATA connectors supported by the motherboard Southbridge chip. You may also create a RAID set(s) in a Windows ® operating environment using the Global Array Manager (GAM) application. Refer to the GAM user guide in the motherboard support CD for details. To enter the LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility: 1. Turn on the system after installing all the SATA hard disk drives. 2. During POST, the LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility automatically detects the installed SATA hard disk drives and displays any existing RAID set(s). Press <Ctrl> <M> to enter the utility. The LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID automatically conï¬gures a RAID 1 (Mirrored) set when the SATA is conï¬gured as RAID in the BIOS and you installed two hard disk drives without a RAID conï¬guration.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 1 3 5 . 3 . 1 C r e a t i n g a R A I D s e t The LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID Setup Utility allows you to create a RAID 0 or RAID 1 set using two types of conï¬gurations: Easy and New. In Easy Conï¬guration, the logical drive parameters are set automatically including the size and stripe size (RAID 1 only). In New Conï¬guration, you manually set the logical drive parameters and assign the set size and stripe size (RAID 1 only). 3. The utility main window appears. Use the arrow keys to select an option from the Management Menu, then press <Enter>. Refer to the Management Menu descriptions below. At the bottom of the screen is the legend box. The keys on the legend box allow you to navigate through the setup menu options or execute commands. The keys on the legend box vary according to the menu level. M e n u D e s c r i p t i o n Conï¬gure Allows you to create RAID 0, RAID 1, or RAID 10 set using the Easy Conï¬guration or the New Conï¬guration command. This menu also allows you to view, add, or clear RAID conï¬gurations or select the boot drive Initialize Allows you to initialize the logical drives of a created RAID set Objects Allows you to initialize logical drives or change the logical drive parameters Rebuild Allows you to rebuild failed drives Check Consistency Allows you to check the data consistency of the logical drives of a created RAID set
5 - 1 4 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n U s i n g E a s y C o n f i g u r a t i o n To create a RAID set using the Easy Conï¬guration option: 1. From the utility main menu, highlight Conï¬gure, then press <Enter>. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Easy Conï¬guration , then press <Enter>. 3. The ARRAY SELECTION MENU displays the available drives connected to the SATA ports. Select the drives you want to include in the RAID set, then press <SpaceBar>. When selected, the drive indicator changes from READY to ONLIN A[X]-[Y], where X is the array number, and Y is the drive number. The information of the selected hard disk drive displays at the bottom of the screen.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 1 5 4. Select all the drives required for the RAID set, then press <Enter>. The conï¬gurable array appears on screen. 5. Press <F10>, select the conï¬gurable array, then press <SpaceBar>. The logical drive information appears including a Logical Drive menu that allows you to change the logical drive parameters.
5 - 1 6 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 6. Select RAID from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 7. Select the RAID level from the menu, then press <Enter>. Yo u need at l ea st two id en ti ca l ha rd di sk dri ves w he n crea tin g a RA ID 1 se t. 8. When creating a RAID 1 or a RAID 10 set, select Stripe Size from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. When creating a RAID 0 set, proceed to step 10. 9. Key in the stripe size, then press <Enter>. For ser ver syst ems , we rec omme nd that you us e a lowe r a rray blo ck s ize . For mul time dia com pute r sy stem s u sed main ly for audi o a nd v ideo edi tin g, we r eco mmen d a high er arra y bl ock siz e fo r o ptim um p erfo rma nce.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 1 7 10. When ï¬nished setting the selected logical drive conï¬guration, select Accept from the menu, then press <Enter>. 11. Follow steps 5 to 10 to conï¬gure additional logical drives. 12. When prompted, save the conï¬guration, then press <Esc> to return to the Management Menu.
5 - 1 8 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n When a RAID set is alr eady exi sti ng, usin g t he Ne w Co nï¬g urat ion comm and era ses the exi stin g RA ID conï¬ gura tio n da ta. If y ou do n ot w ant to d ele te t he e xis ting RAI D se t, use the View /Add Co nï¬gu rati on c omm and to v iew or crea te anot her RAID co nï¬gu rati on. To create a RAID set using the New Conï¬guration option: 1. From the utility main menu, highlight Conï¬gure, then press <Enter>. 2. Use the arrow keys to select New Conï¬guration , then press <Enter>. 3. Follow steps 3 to 7 of the previous section. 4. Select Size from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 5. Key in the desired logical drive size, then press <Enter>. 6. Follow steps 8 to 12 of the previous section to create the RAID set. U s i n g N e w C o n f i g u r a t i o n
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 1 9 5 . 3 . 2 A d d i n g o r v i e w i n g a R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n You can add a new RAID conï¬guration or view an existing conï¬guration using the View/Add Conï¬guration command. A d d i n g a n e w R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n To add a new RAID conï¬guration: 1. From the Man age ment Me nu, hi ghli ght Con ï¬gu re, the n p ress <E nte r>. 2. Use the arrow keys to select View/A dd Con ï¬gur ati on, then press <Enter>. 3. The ARRAY SEL ECT ION MEN U displays the available drives connected to the SATA ports. Select the drive(s) you want to include in the RAID set, then press <SpaceBar>. When selected, the drive indicator changes from READ Y to ONL IN A [X] -[Y ], where X is the array number, and Y is the drive number. The information of the selected hard disk drive displays at the bottom of the screen.
5 - 2 0 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 4. Select all the drives required for the RAID set, then press <Enter>. The conï¬gurable array appears on screen. 5. Press <F10>, select the conï¬gurable array, then press <SpaceBar>. The logical drive information appears including a Logical Drive menu that allows you to change the logical drive parameters.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 2 1 6. Follow steps 6 to 7 of the Creating a RAID set: Using Easy Conï¬guration section. 7. Select Size from the Logical Drive menu, then press <Enter>. 8. Key in the desired logical drive size, then press <Enter>. 9. Follow steps 8 to 12 of the Creating a RAID set : Using Easy Conï¬guration section to add the new RAID conï¬guration.
5 - 2 2 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 5 . 3 . 3 I n i t i a l i z i n g t h e l o g i c a l d r i v e s After creating the RAID set(s), you must initialize the logical drives. You may initialize the logical drives of a RAID set(s) using the Initialize or Objects command in the Management Menu. U s i n g t h e I n i t i a l i z e c o m m a n d To initialize the logical drive using the Initialize command: 1. From the Management Menu, highlight Initialize, then press <Enter>. 2. The screen displays the available RAID set(s) and prompts you to select the logical drive to initialize. Use the arrow keys to select the logical drive from the Logical Drive selection, then press <Enter>.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 2 3 3. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select Yes from the Initialize? dialog box, then press <Enter>. You may also press <F10> to initialize the drive without conï¬rmation. Initializing a logical drive(s) erases all data on the drive. 4. A progress bar appears on screen. If desired, press <Esc> to abort initialization.
5 - 2 4 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 5. When initialization is completed, press <Esc>. U s i n g t h e O b j e c t s c o m m a n d To initialize the logical drives using the Objects command: 1. From the Management Menu, highlight Objects, then press <Enter>.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 2 5 2. Select Logical Drive from the Objects sub-menu, then press <Enter>. 3. Select the logical drive to initialize from the Logical Drives sub-menu, then press <Enter>. 4. Select Initialize from the pop-up menu, then press <Enter> to start initialization.
5 - 2 6 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 5. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select Yes from the Initialize? dialog box, then press <Enter>. You may also press <F10> to initialize the drive without conï¬rmation. 6. A progress bar appears on screen. If desired, press <Esc> to abort initialization. 7. When initialization is completed, press <Esc>.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 2 7 5 . 3 . 4 R e b u i l d i n g f a i l e d d r i v e s You can manually rebuild failed hard disk drives using the Rebuild or Objects command in the Management Menu. U s i n g t h e R e b u i l d c o m m a n d To rebuild a failed hard disk drive using the Rebuild command: 1. From the Management Menu, highlight Rebuild, then press <Enter>. 2. The PHYSICAL DRIVES SELECTION MENU displays the available drives connected to the SATA ports. Select the drive you want to rebuild, then press <SpaceBar>.
5 - 2 8 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 3. After selecting the drive to rebuild, press <F10>. The indicator for the selected drive now shows RBLD. 4. When prompted, press <Y> to to rebuild the drive. 5. When rebuild is complete, press any key to continue. U s i n g t h e O b j e c t s c o m m a n d To rebuild a failed hard disk drive using the Objects command: 1. From the Management Menu, select Objects , then select Physical Drive from the menu. 2. Use the arrow keys to select the physical drive you want to rebuild, then press <Enter>. 3. Select Rebuild from the pop-up menu, then press <Enter>. 4. When prompted, press <Y> to to rebuild the drive. 5. When rebuild is complete, press any key to continue.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 2 9 5 . 3 . 5 C h e c k i n g t h e d r i v e s f o r d a t a c o n s i s t e n c y You can check and verify the accuracy of data redundancy in the selected logical drive. The utility can automatically detect and/or detect and correct any differences in data redundancy depending on the selected option in the Objects > Adapter menu. The Check Consistency command is available only for logical drives included in a RAID 1 set. U s i n g t h e C h e c k C o n s i s t e n c y To check data consistency using the Check Consistency command: 1. From the Management Menu, select Check Consistency , then press <Enter>. 2. The screen displays the available RAID set(s) and prompts you to select the logical drive to check. Use the arrow keys to select the logical drive from the Logical Drive selection, then press <Enter>.
5 - 3 0 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 3. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select Yes from the Consistency Check dialog box, then press <Enter>. You may also press <F10> to check the drive consistency. A progress bar appears on screen. 4. While checking the disk consistency, press <Esc> to display the following options. ⢠Stop - Stops the consistency check. The utility stores the percentage of disk checked. When you restart checking, it continues from the last percentage completed rather than from zero percent. ⢠Continue - Continues the consistency check. ⢠Abort - Aborts the consistency check. When you restart checking, it continues from zero percent. 5. When checking is complete, press any key to continue.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 3 1 U s i n g t h e O b j e c t s c o m m a n d To check data consistency using the Objects command: 1. From the Management Menu, select Objects , then select Logical Drive from the menu. 2. Use the arrow keys to select the logical drive you want to check, then press <Enter>. 3 . Se le ct Check Consistency f ro m th e po p- up m en u , th en p re s s < En te r> . 4. When prompted, press <Y> to to check the drive. 5. When checking is complete, press any key to continue.
5 - 3 2 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 5 . 3 . 6 D e l e t i n g a R A I D c o n f i g u r a t i o n To delete a RAID conï¬guration: 1. From the Management Menu, select Conï¬gure > Clear Conï¬ guration, then press <Enter>. 2. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select Yes from the Clear Conï¬guration? dialog box, then press <Enter>. The utility clears the current array. 3. Press any key to continue.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 5 - 3 3 5 . 3 . 7 S e l e c t i n g t h e b o o t d r i v e f r o m a R A I D s e t You must have created a new RAID conï¬guration before you can select the boot drive from a RAID set. Refer to the Creating a RAID set: Using New Conï¬guration section for details. To select the boot drive from a RAID set: 1. From the Management Menu, select Conï¬gure > Select Boot Drive , then press <Enter>. 2. When prompted, press the <SpaceBar> to select the bootable logical drive from the list, then press <Enter>. 3. The logical drive is selected as boot drive. Press any key to continue.
5 - 3 4 C h a p t e r 5 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 5 . 3 . 8 E n a b l i n g t h e W r i t e C a c h e You may enable the RAID controllerʼs WriteCache option to improve the data transmission performance. Wh en y ou e nab le W rite Cac he , yo u ma y l os e da ta w hen a p ow er i nte rr up tion oc cu rs w hil e tr an smit tin g or e xcha ngi ng d at a am ong t he dri ves . To enable WriteCache: 1. From the Management Menu, select Objects > Adapter , then press <Enter> to display the adapter properties. 2. Select WriteCache, then press <Enter> to turn the option On (enabled). 3. When ï¬nished, press any key to continue. 5.4 Global Array Manager You may also create a RAID set(s) in Windows ® operating environment using the Global Array Manager (GAM) application. The GAM application is available from the motherboard support CD. Refer to the GAM user guide in the motherboard support CD for details.
6 Driver installation This chapter provides information on RAID, LAN and VGA driver installation for this motherboard.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C Chapter summary 6 6.1 RAID driver installation .......................................................... 6-1 6.2 LAN driver installation ........................................................ 6-11 6.3 VGA driver installation ........................................................ 6-15 6.4 Management applications and utilities installation .............. 6-17
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 6 - 1 A) Fre eDO S co mman d pr om pt B) Create ICH7R LSI MegaRAID IDE Driver for Windows Driver Disk C) Create ICH7R LSI MegaRAID IDE Driver for RHEL3UP6 driver D) Create ICH7R Intel Matrix Storage for Windows driver disk E) Create LSI Logic Fusion-MPT MiniPort for Win2K driver F) Create LSI Logic Fusion-MPT MiniPort for Win2K3 32 bit driver G) Broadcom ASF Firmware Update Please choose A To G: 6.1 RAID driver installation After creating the RAID sets for your server system, you are now ready to install an operating system to the independent hard disk drive or bootable array. This part provides instructions on how to install the RAID controller drivers during OS installation. 6 . 1 . 1 C r e a t i n g a R A I D d r i v e r d i s k You may have to use another system to create the RAID driver disk from the system/motherboard support CD or from the Internet. A ï¬oppy disk with the RAID driver is required when installing Windows ® 2000 or Red Hat ® Enterprise ver. 3.0/SuSE operating system on a hard disk drive that is included in a RAID set. You can create a RAID driver disk in DOS (using the Makedisk application in the support CD). To create a RAID driver disk in DOS environment: 1. Place the motherboard support CD in the optical drive. 2. Restart the computer, then enter the BIOS Setup. 3. Select the optical drive as the ï¬rst boot priority to boot from the support CD. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup. 4. Restart the computer. 5. Press any key when prompted to boot from CD. The Makedisk menu appears. Loading FreeDOS FAT KERNEL GO! Press any key to boot from CDROM... 6. Place a blank, high-density ï¬oppy disk to the ï¬ oppy disk drive, then select the type of RAID driver disk you want to create by typing the number before the option 7. Press <Enter>. 8. Follow screen instructions to create the driver disk. For sys tems wit h R ed H at ® Enterprise versions that are not listed in the Makedisk menu, explore the support CD and copy the RAID driver disk from the following path: \Drivers\ICH7R\LSI\Linux.
6 - 2 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n W i n d o w s ® 2 0 0 0 / 2 0 0 3 S e r v e r To create a RAID driver disk in Windows ® 2000/2003 Server environment: 1. Restart the system from the hard disk drive, then place the system/ motherboard support CD in the optical drive. 2. Browse the contents of the support CD to locate the driver disk utility. The 32-bit OS RAID driver disk for the Intel ® ICH7R is located in: \Drivers\ICH7R\Intel\Matrix\Makedisk\F6ï¬py32 The 64-bit OS RAID driver disk for the Intel ® ICH7R is located in: \Drivers\ICH7R\Intel\Matrix\Makedisk\F6ï¬py64 3. Insert a formatted high-density ï¬oppy disk to the ï¬oppy disk drive. 4. Follow screen instructions to complete the process. 5. After creating a RAID driver disk, eject the ï¬ oppy disk, then write-protect it to prevent computer virus infection.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 6 - 3 6 . 1 . 2 I n s t a l l i n g t h e R A I D c o n t r o l l e r d r i v e r W i n d o w s ® 2 0 0 0 / 2 0 0 3 S e r v e r O S D u r i n g W i n d o w s ® 2 0 0 0 / 2 0 0 3 S e r v e r O S i n s t a l l a t i o n To install the RAID controller driver when installing Windows ® 2000/2003 Server OS: 1. Boot the computer using the Windows® 2000/2003 Server installation CD. The Windows ® 2000/2003 Setup starts. 2. Press <F6> when the message âPress F6 if you need to install a third party SCSI or RAID driver...â appears at the bottom of the screen. 3. When prompted, press <S> to specify an additional device.
6 - 4 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 4. Insert the RAID driver disk you created earlier to the ï¬ oppy disk drive, then press <Enter>. 5. Select the RAID controller driver from the list, then press <Enter>. There are two items to select: L S I L o g i c S A T A R A I D Select âLSI Logic Embedded SATA RAIDâ for Windows 2000 or 32bit Windows 2003 Server OS from the list, then press <Enter>. For 64bit Windows 2003 Server OS, please select âLSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID ( Intel IA32E )â item.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 6 - 5 T o a n e x i s t i n g W i n d o w s ® 2 0 0 0 / 2 0 0 3 S e r v e r O S To install the RAID controller driver on an existing Windows ® 2000/2003 Server OS: 1. Restart the computer, then log on with Administrator privileges. 2. Windows ® automatically detects the RAID controller and displays a New Hardware Found window. Click Cancel. 3. Right-click the My Computer icon on the Windows ® desktop , then select Properties from the menu. 4. Click the Hardware tab, then click the Device Manager button to display the list of devices installed in the system. I n t e l M a t r i x S t o r a g e Select âIntel(R) 82801GR/ GH SATA RAID Control ler (Desktop ICH7RDH)â for Intel Matrix Storage RAID mode from the list, then press <Enter>. If you conï¬gured SATA as AHCI Mode in the BIOS setup utility of IDE Conï¬guration, ï¬rst install the Intel SATA AHCI Driver during windows setup. Then, select the âIntel(R) 82801GR/GH SATA AHCI Controller (Desktop ICH7RDH)â from the list. Refer to section â6.1.1 Creating a RAID driver diskâ to create the Intel SATA Driver for windows system. 6. The Windows ® 2000/2003 Setup loads the RAID controller drivers from the RAID driver disk. When prompted, press <Enter> to continue installation. 7. Setup then proceeds with the OS installation. Follow screen instructions to continue.
6 - 6 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 5. Right-click the RAID controller item, then select Properties. 6. Click the Driver tab, then click the Update Driver button. 7. The Upgrade Device Driver Wizard window appears. Click Next. 8. Insert the RAID driver disk you created earlier to the ï¬ oppy disk drive. 9. Select the option âSearch for a suitable driver for my device (recommended)â, then click Next. 10. The wizard searches the RAID controller drivers. When found, click Next to install the drivers. 11. Click Finish after the driver installation is done.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 6 - 7 To verify the RAID controller driver installation: 1. Right-click the My Computer icon on the Windows ® desktop , then select Properties from the menu. 2. Click the Hardware tab, then click the Device Manager button. 3. Click the â â sign before the item SCSI and RAID controllers. When you installed the Intel ® ICH7R SATA RAID controller driver, the Intel(R) 82801GR/GH SATA RAID Controller item should appear. 4. Right-click the RAID controller driver item, then select Properties from the menu. 5. Click the Driver tab, then click the Driver Details button to display the RAID controller drivers. 6. Click OK when ï¬nished. When you installed the LSI logic embedded SATA RAID driver, the LSI Logic Embedded SATA RAID item should appear.
6 - 8 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n R e d H a t ® E n t e r p r i s e v e r . 3 . 0 To install the RAID controller driver when installing Red Hat ® Enterprise ver. 3.0 OS: 1. Boot the system from the Red Hat ® Installation CD. 2. At the boot:, type linux dd , then press <Enter>.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 6 - 9 4. Select fd0 using the <Tab> key when asked to select the driver disk source. Press <Tab> to move the cursor to OK, then press <Enter>. 3. Select Yes using the <Tab> key when asked if you have the driver disk. Press <Enter>
6 - 1 0 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 6. When asked if you will load additional RAID controller drivers, select No, then press <Enter>. 7. Follow screen instructions to continue the OS installation. 5. When prompted, insert the Red Hat ® Enterprise ver. 3.0 RAID driver disk to the ï¬oppy disk drive, select OK, then press <Enter>. The drivers for the RAID controller are installed to the system.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 6 - 1 1 6.2 LAN driver installation This section provides instructions on how to install the Broadcom ® Gigabit LAN controller drivers. 6 . 2 . 1 W i n d o w s ® 2 0 0 0 / 2 0 0 3 S e r v e r To install the Broadcom ® Gigabit LAN controller driver on a Windows ® 2000/2003 Server OS: 1. Restart the computer, then log on with Administrator privileges. 2. Insert the motherboard/system support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer. ⢠Wi nd ows ® automatically detects the LAN controllers and displays a New Hardware Found window. Click Cancel to close this window. ⢠If Autorun is NOT enabled in your computer, browse the contents of the support CD to locate the ï¬le ASSETUP.EXE from the BIN folder. Double-click the ASSETUP.EXE to run the CD. 3. Click the Broadcom 5753 Driver option to begin installation.
6 - 1 2 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 4. Click Next when the InstallShield Wizard window appears. Follow screen instructions to continue installation.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 6 - 1 3 6 . 2 . 2 R e d H a t ® E n t e r p r i s e v e r . 3 . 0 Follow these instructions when installing the Broadcom ® Gigabit LAN controller base driver for the Red Hat ® Enterprise ver. 3.0 operating system. I n s t a l l i n g t h e s o u r c e R P M p a c k a g e To install the source RPM package: 1. Install the source RPM package: rpm -ivh bcm5700-<version>.src.rpm 2. Change the directory to the RPM path and build the binary driver for your kernel: cd /usr/src/{redhat,OpenLinux,turbo,packages,rpm ..} rpm -bb SPECS/bcm5700.spec or rpmbuild -bb SPECS/ bcm5700.spec The RPM path is different for different Linux distributions. 3. Install the newly built package (driver and man page): rpm -ivh RPMS/i386/bcm5700-<version>.i386.rpm For 2.2.x kernels, the driver is installed in: /lib/modules/<kernel_version>/net/bcm5700.o For 2.4.x kernels, the driver is installed in: /lib/modules/<kernel_version>/kernel/drivers/net/ bcm5700.o For 2.4.x kernels with bcm5700 driver patched in, the driver is installed in: /lib/modules/<kernel_version>/kernel/drivers/net/bcm/ bcm5700.o or /lib/modules/<kernel_version>/kernel/drivers/addon/ bcm5700/bcm5700.o 4. Load the driver: insmod bcm5700 5. Refer to Linux distribution documentation to conï¬ gure the network protocol and address. You need the force option when installing the driver on some distributions that has an older version of the driver.
6 - 1 4 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n B u i l d i n g t h e d r i v e r f r o m t h e T A R f i l e To build the driver from the TAR ï¬le: 1. Create a directory and extract the TAR ï¬ les: tar xvzf bcm5700-<version>.tar.gz 2. Build the driver bcm5700.o as a loadable module for the running kernel: cd bcm5700-<version>/src make 3. Test the driver by loading it: insmod bcm5700.o 4. Install the driver and man page: make install See the RPM instructions on the previous page for the location of the installed driver. 5. Refer to Red Hat distribution documentation to conï¬ gure the network protocol and address.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 6 - 1 5 6.3 VGA driver installation This section provides instructions on how to install the ATI ® RAGE XL Video Graphics Adapter (VGA) driver. 6 . 3 . 1 W i n d o w s ® 2 0 0 0 S e r v e r You need to manually install the ATI ® RAGE XL VGA driver on a Windows ® 2000 Server operating system. To install the ATI ® RAGE XL VGA driver: 1. Restart the computer, then log on with Administrator privileges. 2. Insert the motherboard/system support CD to the optical drive. The support CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer. Windows ® automatically detects the LAN controller and displays a New Hardware Found window. Click Cancel to close this window. 3. Cli ck the i tem A TI Ra ge XL Di sp lay Dr ive r fro m the Dr ive rs me nu . 4. The ATI W ind ows 20 00 Dri ve r window appears. Click Ne xt. Follow screen instructions to complete installation.
6 - 1 6 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 6 . 3 . 3 R e d H a t ® E n t e r p r i s e v e r . 3 . 0 The Red Hat ® Enterprise ver. 3.0 operating system automatically recognizes the ATI ® RAGE XL VGA driver during system installation. There is no need to install an additional driver(s) to support the onboard VGA. 6 . 3 . 2 W i n d o w s ® 2 0 0 3 S e r v e r The Windows ® 2003 Server operating system automatically recognizes the ATI ® RAGE XL VGA driver during system installation. There is no need to install an additional driver(s) to support the onboard VGA. V e r i f y i n g t h e V G A d r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n To verify if the ATI ® RAGE XL VGA drivers are properly installed in a Windows ® 2000/2003 Server operating system: 1. Right-click the My Computer icon on the Windows ® desktop, then select Properties from the menu. 2. Click the Hardware tab, then click the Device Manager button. 3. Click the â â sign before the item Display adapters . The ATI Technologies Inc. RAGE XL PCI item should appear. 4. Right-click the ATI Technologies Inc. RAGE XL PCI item, then select Properties from the menu. 5. Click the Driver tab, then click the Driver Details button to display the VGA drivers. 6. Click OK when ï¬nished.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C 6 - 1 7 6.4 Management applications and utilities installation The support CD that came with the motherboard package contains the drivers, management applications, and utilities that you can install to avail all motherboard features. The contents of the support CD are subject to change at any time without notice. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) for updates. 6 . 4 . 1 R u n n i n g t h e s u p p o r t C D Place the support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer. If Autorun is NOT enabled in your computer, browse the contents of the support CD to locate the ï¬le ASSETUP.EXE from the BIN folder. Double- click the ASSETUP.EXE to run the CD. 6 . 4 . 2 D r i v e r s m e n u The Dri ver s m enu sho ws the ava ila ble dev ice dr ive rs i f t he syst em det ects ins tall ed dev ice s. I nst all the ne ces sar y dr ive rs to a cti vat e t he d evi ces . The screen display and driver options vary under different operating system versions.
6 - 1 8 C h a p t e r 6 : D r i v e r i n s t a l l a t i o n 6 . 4 . 3 M a n a g e m e n t S o f t w a r e m e n u The Management Software menu displays the available network and server monitoring applications. Click on an item to install. 6 . 4 . 4 U t i l i t i e s m e n u The Utilities menu displays the software applications and utilities that the motherboard supports. Click on an item to install. 6 . 4 . 5 C o n t a c t i n f o r m a t i o n Click the Contact tab to display the ASUS contact information. You can also ï¬nd this information on the inside front cover of this user guide.
A The appendix includes additional information that you may refer to when conï¬guring the motherboard. Reference information
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C Appendix summary A A.1 Intel ® EM64T ......................................................................... A-1 A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep ® Technology (EIST) .................... A-1 A.3 Intel ® Hyper-Threading Technology ...................................... A-3 A.4 Block diagram ....................................................................... A-4
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C A - 1 A.1 Intel ® EM64T ⢠The motherboard is fully compatible with Intel ® Pentium ® 4 LGA775 processors running on 32-bit operating systems. ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS ï¬le that supports EM64T. You can download the latest BIOS ï¬le from the ASUS website (www.asus. com/support/download/) if you need to update the BIOS ï¬le. See Chapter 4 for details. ⢠Visit www.intel.com for more information on the EM64T feature. ⢠Vi si t ww w.m ic ro so ft.c om fo r mo re i nfo rm at ion on Wi nd ow s ® 64-bit OS. U s i n g t h e I n t e l ® E M 6 4 T f e a t u r e To use the Intel ® EM64T feature: 1. Install an Intel ® Pentium ® 4 CPU that supports the Intel ® EM64T. 2. Install a 64-bit operating system (Windows ® Server 2003 x64 Edition). 3. Install the 64-bit drivers for the motherboard components and devices from the support CD. 4. Install the 64-bit drivers for expansion cards or add-on devices, if any. Refe r t o th e ex pan sion car d or ad d-on dev ice (s) docu men tati on, or v isi t the rel ated web sit e, t o ve rify if the car d/d evic e su ppo rts a 64 -bi t sy stem . A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep ® Technology (EIST) ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS ï¬le that supports EIST. You can download the latest BIOS ï¬le from the ASUS website (www. asus.com/support/download/) if you need to update the BIOS. See Chapter 4 for details. ⢠Visit www.intel.com for more information on the EIST feature. A . 2 . 1 S y s t e m r e q u i r e m e n t s Before using EIST, check your system if it meets the following requirements: ⢠I ntel ® Pentium ® 4 processor with EIST support ⢠BIOS ï¬le with EIST support ⢠Operating system with EIST support (Windows ® Server 2003 SP1/ Linux 2.6 kernel or later versions)
A - 2 A p p e n d i x A : R e f e r e n c e i n f o r m a t i o n A . 2 . 2 U s i n g t h e E I S T To use the EIST feature: 1. Tur n o n t he co mp ute r, th en en te r t he BI OS Se tup . 2. Go to the A dv anc ed Me nu, h ig hli ght C PU Co nï¬g ur ati on , then press <Enter>. 3. Set the Int el (R) Sp ee dSt ep Te ch nol og y item to [Automatic], then press <Enter>. See page 4-22 for details. 4. Pre ss <F1 0> to s ave yo ur ch an ges a nd ex it th e B IOS s etu p. 5. After the computer restarts, right click on a blank space on the desktop, then select Pr op ert ie s from the pop-up menu. 6. When the Dis pl ay Pr ope rti es window appears, click the Sc re en Sa ver tab. 7. Click the Pow er button on the Monitor power section to open the Po wer O pti on s P ro per ti es window. 8 . O n t h e Po we r s che me s se c t i o n , c l i c k , t h e n s e l e c t a ny o p t i o n except Home/Ofï¬ce Desktop or Always On. 9. Click App ly , then click OK. 10. Close the Di spl ay Pr op ert ie s window. Af ter y ou ad jus t the p owe r sc hem e, th e CPU i nte rna l fr equ en cy sl igh tl y d ecr ea ses wh en th e C PU lo ad ing is l ow. The screen displays and procedures may vary depending on the operating system.
A S U S P 5 M T - M X / C A - 3 A.3 Intel ® Hyper-Threading Technology ⢠The motherboard supports Intel ® Pentium ® 4 LGA775 processors with Hyper-Threading Technology. ⢠Hy pe r-Th rea di ng T echn olo gy i s supp ort ed u nder 2003 Server and Linux 2.4.x (kernel) and later versions only. Under Linux, use the Hyper-Threading compiler to compile the code. If you are using any other operating systems, disable the Hyper-Threading Techonology item in the BIOS to ensure system stability and performance. ⢠Make sure to enable the Hyper-Threading Technology item in BIOS before installing a supported operating system. ⢠For more information on Hyper-Threading Technology, visit www. intel.com/info/hyperthreading. U s i n g t h e H y p e r - T h r e a d i n g T e c h n o l o g y To use the Hyper-Threading Technology: 1. Install an Intel ® Pentium ® 4 CPU that supports Hyper-Threading Technology. 2. Power up the system and enter the BIOS Setup. Under the Advanced Menu, make sure that the item Hyper-Threading Technology is set to Enabled. Se e p ag e 4 -22 for d eta il s. The BIOS item appears only if you installed a CPU that supports Hyper-Threading Techonology. 3. Restart the computer.
A - 4 A p p e n d i x A : R e f e r e n c e i n f o r m a t i o n A.4 Block diagram Northbridge Intel ® Mukilteo LPC-Bus 2x DDR2 533/667 DIMM Slots DMI PCI-E X8 4xDDR2 533/667 SDRAM (max. 8 GB) SMBus H/W monitors W83792AD Slot 3 PCI-E X1 BCM5753 Smithfield/Cendar Mill Processor with 800/1066MHz system bus Southbridge Intel ® ICH7R W83627EHF Keyboard Serial Port *2 Floppy Mouse Parallel Port BIOS Flash 8 Mbit MUX Fan *6 Voltage * PCI- E X4 X8 Slot 2 Slot 4 X16 Slot 1 2x DDR2 533/667 DIMM Slots PCI 32Bit/33MHz ATI Rage XL SATA All *4 IDE *1 USB 2.0*8 Super I/O